Sie sind auf Seite 1von 460

RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS

RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS

Technical
Service
Manual
Part Number: 4114846-001
Rev: M
Date: 23 August 2001
© 2001 Draeger Medical, Inc.

Narkomed 6000
Anesthesia System
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS

Narkomed 6000 Service Manual Table of Contents

Summary of What's New in Rev. M

DESCRIPTION PAGE
SECTION 1:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2:
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Accessing the Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Advanced Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Service Monitors Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Service Configuration Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5 Service Dump Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.6 Service Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.6A Service Log Entry Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18B
2.7 NM6000 Event Log Transfer Using Service Laptop with Windows 95 or 98 . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.7A NM6000 Event Log Transfer Using Service Laptop with Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23A
2.7B Event Log Transfer: Alternate Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23H
2.8 Divan Ventilator Power-up Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.9 Divan Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

SECTION 3:
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Power Supply and Voltage Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Troubleshooting Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4A

SECTION 4:
Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Cylinder Yoke Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Cylinder Pressure Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 Flow Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.6 Minimum O2 Flow Cutoff Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.7 Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.8 Oxygen Supply Failure Protection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.9 Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.10 Oxygen Ratio Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.11 O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.12 Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Diaphragm Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.13 Divan Ventilator PCB Assemblies, Battery and EPROM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.14 Breathing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.15 Breathing System and Ventilator Lip Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.16 Ventilator Replacement - Complete Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.17 Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.18 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.19 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Rev. L i
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued) NM6000

DESCRIPTION PAGE

4.20 Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60


4.21 VPO Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.22 Vitalbus Hub PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.23 Agent Analyzer Assembly; Lithium Battery (TK-RAM IRIA) Replacement. . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.24 CRT Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.24A Flat Panel Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75A
4.25 Table Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.25A Strip Chart Recorder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77A
4.26 Flow Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.27 Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.28 Lower Frame Cover (skirt) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.29 Divan Safety Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.30 WPU Mother Board Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.31 Vaporizer Mounting and Exclusion System Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.32 Main Pneumatic Valve Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.33 Divan Ventilator Front Bezel and Related Components Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4.34 Integrated Patient Monitor Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

SECTION 5:
Adjustment and Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4 Oxygen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Breathing Pressure Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.6 Agent Monitor Sample Flow Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.7 CRT Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.7A Flat Panel Brightness, Contrast and Phase Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17A
5.8 Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8A Advanced Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19A
5.9 Ventilator Supply Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.10 Ventilator Supply Flow Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.11 Ventilator Control Pressure Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.12 Breathing System Leveling Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.13 Bag Pole Friction Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.14 Right Vaporizer Vertical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.15 System Electrical Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

SECTION 6:
PMS Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Periodic Manufacturers Certification General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
PM Certification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.1 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2 Battery Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3 Open Reservoir Scavenger - if applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 Scavenger Interface, A/C - if applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.5 Suction Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6 Suction Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.7 High Pressure Leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.8 Regulator and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

ii Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 CONTENTS (continued)

DESCRIPTION PAGE

6.9 Oxygen Supply Failure Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22


6.10 Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11 Oxygen Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.12 Oxygen Concentration Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.13 Oxygen Ratio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.14 Fresh Gas Leak Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.15 Minimum O2 Control Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.16 Divan Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.17 Divan Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.18 Divan Operating Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.19 Respiratory Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.20 Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.21 Agent Analyzer Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.22 O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6.23 Reset Logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.24 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.25 Vapor Exclusion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.26 Table Top Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.27 Flowmeter Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.28 CRT Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.29 Operator’s Instruction Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.30 Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56

SECTION 6A:
PMS Procedure: Integrated Patient Monitoring Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
6A.1 Electrical Safety Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
6A.2 ECG Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5
6A.3 Battery Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-7
6A.4 Defibrilator Synchronization Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-8
6A.5 ST Segment Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-9
6A.6 Invasive Blood Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10
6A.7 Temperature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-16
6A.8 Cardiac Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-17
6A.9 SPO2/Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-19
6A.10 NIBPStrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-21
6A.11 Chart Recorder Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-23
6A.12 Final IPMM and Strip Chart Recorder Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-24

SECTION 7:
System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Exclusion System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4 deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.5 deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.6 Gas Analyzer Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.7 Installation of Flow Sensor Anti-rotation Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.8 Installation of Bag Arm O-ring, Locking Knob, and Friction Screw Adjustment. . . . . 7-14
7.9 Lubrication of Ventilator Piston Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.10 deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.11 Vitalbus Hub Conversion to Single Com Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Rev. L iii
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued) NM6000

DESCRIPTION PAGE

SECTION 8:
Spare and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Monitor and touchscreen assembly, related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 8-3
Flat panel display and related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3A, 8-3B
Table lamp assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-5
Strip Chart Recorder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5A, 8-5B
Gas analyzer assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6, 8-7
Integrated Patient Monitoring Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7A, 8-7B
Divan piston-cylinder unit, lip seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9
Divan electronics assemblies, batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
Absorber canister and diffuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11A, 8-11B
Divan breathing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
Ultrasonic flow sensor, oxygen sensor, hose assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14, 8-15
Pipeline inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16, 8-17
Failsafe assemblies, ORC, O2 supply pressure switch, min. flow O2 solenoid . . . . 8-18, 8-19
Flowmeter shield, knobs, gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20, 8-21
Auxiliary O2 flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22, 8-23
Suction switch, vacuum on/off valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23A, 8-23B
Flow tubes, flow control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24, 8-25
Cylinder pressure regulators, O2 flush valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26, 8-27
Bag arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27A, 8-27B
Cylinder yokes and related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28, 8-29
VPO assembly, interface assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30, 8-31
Vitalbus assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32, 8-33
Power supply, casters, processor and related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34, 8-35
Internal cables and wire harness assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36, 8-37
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-39
Scavenger, A/C, Vent Grill Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40, 8-41
Vapor mounting and exclusion system, Touch-up paint: Euro white, Euro Blue . . . 8-42, 8-43

iv Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NARKOMED 6000 ANESTHESIA SYSTEM

GAS
INSTRUMENTATION
PANEL

MONITOR
SCREEN

AUXILIARY O2
FLOWMETER

STRIP CHART
RECORDER

DIVAN
ABSORBER VENTILATOR

SV00285

1-0 Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 INTRODUCTION

1.0 RECOMMENDATIONS
Because of the sophisticated nature of Draeger Medical, Inc. anesthesia equipment and its
critical importance in the operating room setting, it is highly recommended that only
appropriately trained and experienced professionals be permitted to service and maintain
this equipment. Please contact DrägerService® at (800) 543-5047 for service of this
equipment.

Draeger Medical, Inc. also recommends that its anesthesia equipment be serviced at three-
month intervals. Periodic Manufacturer’s Service Agreements are available for equipment
manufactured by Draeger Medical, Inc. For further information concerning these
agreements, please contact us at (800) 543-5047.

Draeger Medical, Inc. products/material in need of factory repair shall be sent to:
DrägerService
3124 Commerce Drive
Telford, PA 18969 U.S.A.
(Include RMA Number)

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL


The manual is divided into several sections. The DIAGNOSTICS section describes self-test
and service diagnostics for checking the system functions. An understanding of the on-board
service capabilities is necessary before any attempt is made to troubleshoot the unit. The
TROUBLESHOOTING section lists error codes and provides troubleshooting guides to
assist the Technical Service Representative in locating the source of a problem. The
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES section contains instructions for removal and replacement
of assemblies that are considered field-replaceable. The ADJUSTMENT AND
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES section contains the field procedures needed to restore
original system specifications. The Periodic Manufacturer’s Service (PMS) PROCEDURE
section outlines the steps required to verify the electrical, mechanical and pneumatic safety
of the unit and also identifies components requiring periodic replacement.

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES


Troubleshooting the Narkomed 6000 should always begin by communicating with those who
observed or experienced a problem with the unit. This may eliminate unnecessary
troubleshooting steps. Once a general problem is identified, refer to the troubleshooting flow
charts in Section 3 to determine the proper corrective action to be taken.

After any component is replaced, verify that the unit is operating properly by running the
appropriate diagnostic procedure. The PMS PROCEDURE in Section 6 must also be
performed after any component is replaced.

The general arrangement of the Narkomed 6000 anesthesia system is shown on the opposite
page.

1-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION (continued) NM6000

WARNINGS
Warnings are used in this manual before procedures which if not performed correctly could
result in personal injury.

CAUTIONS
Cautions are used in this manual to alert service personnel to the possibility of damage to
the equipment if a procedure is not performed correctly.

Copyright
Copyright© 2001 by Draeger Medical, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, or stored in a retrieval system in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without
written permission of Draeger Medical, Inc.

Trademark Notices
Narkomed, Narkomed GS, Vigilance Audit, Vitalert and Vitalink are registered trademarks
of Draeger Medical, Inc. All other products or name brands are trademarks of their
respective owners.

Disclaimer
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change
without notice. Draeger Medical, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.

1-2
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS

2.0 DIAGNOSTICS

The Narkomed 6000 contains a diagnostic system that monitors certain system functions
and records their operational status. A series of tests is performed when the system is
powered up and the results are displayed on the monitor screen. At the completion of the
diagnostics, one of three screens will appear as shown in the following examples:

SYSTEM 1 PASS
VPO Pod PASS
GAP Pod PASS
VENTILATOR PASS

SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL Continue

SYSTEM 1 PASS
VPO Pod PASS
GAP NVRAM failure FAIL
VENTILATOR PASS

SYSTEM CONDITIONALLY FUNCTIONAL Continue


press key to continue

SYSTEM 1 PASS
VPO Pod Firmware FAIL
GAP Pod PASS
VENTILATOR FAIL

SYSTEM NON-FUNCTIONAL Continue

The screen labeled SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL indicates that all tests have passed. This screen
will be displayed for approximately five seconds, and the system will then proceed to the
monitor screen. (Touching the Continue key will bring up the monitor screen immediately.)

The screen labeled SYSTEM CONDITIONALLY FUNCTIONAL indicates that a problem


has been detected but the system is still usable. This screen will remain displayed until the
Continue key is touched.

The SYSTEM NON-FUNCTIONAL screen indicates that a serious problem has been
detected. The system will not proceed any further.

Further diagnostic functions are available through service screens that can be accessed at
the monitor. The following pages provide a description of the service screens. If no display is
present upon system power-up, refer to Section 3 of this manual for troubleshooting
assistance.

2-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.1 Accessing the Service Screens


To access the service screens you must first touch the Setup key at the bottom of
the screen to display the setup notebook, then touch the About tab to display the
About page of the setup notebook as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1. Setup Notebook About Page

On the About page, touch the following keys in this order:

1. Volume, Pressure, Oxygen

2. Gas Analysis

3. NM6000

4. Strip Chart Recorder

In the service mode, the following keys are added at the bottom of the screen:

Exit Service Service Service Service


Service Monitors Config Dump Log

2-2 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.2 Advanced Service Mode


The Advanced service mode allows the service technician to change the NM6000
serial number via the NM6K Configuration Page (described later), to install or
remove software options, update Pod based software and also allows the Pod
Logs and Service Log (described later) to be cleared.

To enter the Advanced service mode, touch the following keys on the About page
of the Setup Notebook in this order:

1. Strip Chart Recorder


2. NM6000
3. Gas Analysis
4. Volume, Pressure, Oxygen

2.3 Service Monitors Notebook


Touch the Service Monitors key at the bottom of the screen to display the
Service Monitors Notebook.

Touching each tab of the service monitors notebook will bring up the
corresponding service screen page, as described in the following paragraphs.

If desired, touch the Exit Service key to return to the monitoring screen.

Rev. L 2-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.3.1 Oxygen Monitor Service Screen


The Oxygen page of the service monitors notebook is shown on the left
side of Figure 2-2. This page displays current and stored A/D values for
the oxygen cells, date and time of the last O2 zero calibration, and
instructions for performing a zero calibration.

If the O2 zero calibration values stored in the VPO pod are invalid upon
startup, a SERVICE O2 MON advisory is posted, the Service Monitors
Oxygen page will show a blank Last O2 Calibration date, and the
message ZERO CALIBRATION INVALID is displayed on the Service
Monitors Oxygen page as shown on the right side of Figure 2-2. These
three things also occur if a zero calibration is attempted with a current
cell value of less than 230 or greater than 260.

Refer to Section 5 for details on both zero and 21% O2 calibrations.

Figure 2-2. Service Monitors Notebook, Oxygen Page

2-4 Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.3.2 Pressure Monitor Service Screen


Touch the Pressure tab of the Service Monitors Notebook to display the
pressure monitor service screen shown in Figure 2-3.

This page displays current pressure value, stored zero and span values,
and procedures for performing zero and span calibrations.

Test equipment connections are given in Section 5.

Figure 2-3. Service Monitors Notebook, Pressure Page

Rev. B 2-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.3.3 Gas Analyzer Sample Flow Service Screen


Touch the GAP tab of the Service Monitors Notebook to display the flow
monitor service screen shown in Figure 2-4.

This page provides touch keys and procedures for adjusting and storing
the high (200 mL/min.) and low (100 mL/min.) sample line flow rates.
Line block, accuracy mode, and calibration in progress indications are
also provided on this page.

Location of the adjustable flow restrictor for initial flow rate setting, and
test equipment connections are given in Section 5.

Figure 2-4. Service Monitors Notebook, GAP Page

2-6 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.3.4 Screen Functions


Touch the Screen tab of the Service Monitors Notebook to display the
service screen shown in Figure 2-5.

Touch screen calibration is needed whenever a monitor is replaced, or


when picture size or centering is adjusted. This ensures correct
registration of the touch screen coordinates with the picture.

NOTE: An advanced touch screen calibration procedure is needed when


calibration is not possible under the usual procedure.

The Brightness/Contrast and Phase buttons are used to display test


patterns for adjustments on machines with a flat panel display.

Refer to Section 5 for the complete procedures.

Figure 2-5. Service Monitors Notebook, Screen Page

Rev. B 2-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.3.5 Port Configuration


Touch the Ports tab of the Service Monitors Notebook to display the port
configuration service screen shown in Figure 2-6. On machines with
only one com port (com 2), the screen shown in Figure 2-6A applies.

This page allows com ports 5, 6, 7, and 8 on the machine to be configured


for communication with external devices. Touching each parameter
displayed allows you to cycle through the available settings for the
corresponding port. The selections are:

Baud: 9600, 19200, 38400


Parity: EVEN, ODD, NONE
Stop Bits: 1, 2
Data Bits: 7, 8
Protocol: Vitalink

When the desired settings are displayed, touch the APPLY key to store
the settings.

Figure 2-6. Service Monitors Notebook, Figure 2-6A. Service Monitors Notebook,
Port Configuration Page Port Configuration Page,
One Com Port

2-8 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.3.6 SCR Print Test


Touch the SCR tab on the Service Monitors Notebook to display the Strip
Chart Recorder Service Screen as shown in Figure 2-6B.

Diagnostic functions are provided for keys on the strip chart recorder.
Touching the PRINT TEST button will produce the printer output shown
in Figure 2-6C.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
*** AR42 Ver. 2.05 **
sn ØØØØ429792

ØØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
1Ø: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
2Ø: !”#$%&’()*+,-./
3Ø: Ø123456789:;<=>?
4Ø: @ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
5Ø: PQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^-
6Ø: ‘abcdefghijklmno
7Ø: pqrstuvwxyz{|}¯
8Ø: ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅ
9Ø: ÉæÆôöòûúÿÖÜ¢£¥.ƒ
AØ: áíóúñÑao¿¯¯¯¯¡¯¯
BØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
CØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
DØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
EØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯
FØ: ¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Figure 2-6B. Service Monitors Notebook,
SCR Page
Figure 2-6C. Test Print

Rev. H 2-8A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

This page intentionally left blank

2-8B Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.4 Service Configuration Notebook


Touch the Service Config key at the bottom of the screen to display the Service
Configuration Notebook shown in Figure 2-7. Tabs are displayed for each pod,
and for the Narkomed 6000. Touching each tab of the service configuration
notebook will bring up the corresponding configuration page, as described in the
following paragraphs. (An Options page is enabled when you are in the
Restricted Service Mode. See Paragraph 2.2A.)

2.4.1 Pod Configuration Pages


The VPO, GAP, SCR and CV pages display the following information for
each pod:

Last Service Date


Hours Running Since Last Service
Total Machine Run Hours
Serial Number
IP Address
Ethernet Address
Identification for Boot Prom, Pod Base Software and Application

VPO

Figure 2-7. Service Configuration Notebook, VPO Page

Rev. F 2-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.4.2 UPDATE Page


Touching the UPDATE tab of the Service Configuration Notebook will
display the page shown in Figure 2-8.

This page allows the service technician to download images to the pods.
If the information on the update page does not match the image on the
host, this information on the update page appears in red when in the
Advanced service mode. When in Advanced mode, pressing the
appropriate box initiates a download, and the information in the boxes
reflects the state of the download. NOTE: When the key is pressed, the
notebook disappears. Press the Service Config key to refresh the Service
Config Notebook. If not in Advanced mode, pressing the boxes will
display the message: “Enter Advanced Access Mode in order to
download.”

Figure 2-8. System Update Download Screen

2-10 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.4.3 NM6K Configuration Page


Touching the NM6K tab of the Service Configuration Notebook will
display the NM6000 configuration page shown in Figure 2-9. This page
displays the Last Service Date, Hours Running Since Last Service, and
Total Machine Run Hours. Touching the RESET LAST SERVICE DATE
key will reset the displayed last service date to the current date for the
machine and for all connected pods.

This page also displays the next PMS Due Date. Touch the or
keys to set the desired date.

A Service Parts listing (described later) is also accessed through this


screen.

Should the machine’s processor be replaced, a new serial number needs


to be entered. You can only do this while in the Advanced service mode:
Press the Serial Number button, and type the new number with the
touch keys that appear on the page. Press the Serial Number button
again to enter the number. This event will be recorded in the Service
Log.

Figure 2-9. Service Configuration Notebook, NM6K Page

Rev. B 2-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.4.4 Service Parts Screens


Press the SERVICE PARTS button on the NM6K Configuration Page to
view the service parts list as shown in Figure 2-10. If you are in the
PMS mode (press the Preventive Maintenance button and enter a valid
technician ID), you will be able to modify the list. If you are not in the
PMS mode and attempt to modify the list, you will be prompted to “Enter
Preventive Maintenance in order to change part information.”

In the user access mode Several keys appear on the Service Parts screen;
their function are as follows:

PREVIOUS: Move to the entry above the current selection.


NEXT: Move to the entry below the current selection
REPLACE: Brings up a dialog box asking if the selected part
was replaced.
SERIAL NUMBER: Brings up a keyboard for the user to enter a serial
number
OK: Saves all information, and returns display to the
NM6K configuration page. Any changes made are
recorded in the service log.
CANCEL: Any changes made to the list are not saved, and
display returns to the NM6K configuration page.

In the Advanced access mode, the following additional keys are


displayed:

FACTORY DEFAULTS: Changes the list to factory defaults for part


numbers, descriptions, quantity and schedule.
SET DATES: Brings up dialog box that allows user to set
dates for the selected part, or to clear all dates.
PART NUMBER: Brings up a keyboard that allows user to
change a part number.

When the Service Parts screen is entered for the first time, all dates and
serial numbers are blank except for pod serial numbers. You can select a
part by using the Previous or Next keys, or by pressing the desired row
on the screen under one of the date columns.

When you press the Replace key, the screen appears as shown in Figure
2-11.

2-12 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Figure 2-10. Service Parts Screen

Figure 2-11. Service Parts Replacement Query

If you press the No button, the dates are not modified.

If you press the Yes button the current date will be entered under Last
Date for the item selected, and the Next Date will be calculated using the
schedule. If there is no replacement schedule, the Next Date will remain
blank.

Rev. B 2-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

If you press any row under the Schedule column, a dialog box will appear
asking if you replaced all parts with the same schedule. If you answer
No, the dates are not modified. If you answer Yes, all dates for parts with
the same schedule can be updated. All blank Next Dates will be modified
assuming that this is the first replacement. If the current date is in the
same month or later than the Next Date, that row will appear in red.

If you press any row in red under the Description or Quantity column, a
dialog box will appear asking if you replaced all parts that are due. If you
answer Yes, the Last Date and Next Date will be updated for all parts
that are due to be replaced.

Pressing the Set Dates key will bring up the screen shown in Figure 2-
12.

4115864

Figure 2-12. Service Parts Set Dates Screen

If you press the Clear Selected Date key, the Last Date and Next Date for
the selected part will be cleared.

If you press the Clear All Dates key, all information in the Last Date and
Next Date columns will be cleared.

If you press the Set Selected Last Date key, The Last Date for the
selected part will be changed to the month and year shown on this
window.

2-14 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

If you press the Set All Next Dates Based on Selected Date and Schedule
key, all the information in the Next Date column will be calculated based
on the selected month and year. The selected month and year can be
changed using the arrow keys.

If you press the Set Selected Next Date key, the Next Date for the
selected part will be changed to the month and year selected.

Pressing the SAVE key will update the parts list display. If you press the
QUIT key, none of the changes made using this window will be saved.

Rev. B 2-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.4.5 NM6000 Software Options Screen


Touching the Options tab in the Service Configuration Notebook will
display the page shown in Figure 2-8A.

This page allows the service technician to enable or disable software


controlled options when in advanced service menu. This page can not be
selected in User Access Service Mode.

NOTE: ‘Low Flow Wizard’ and ‘Air Only Mode’ options also require
keyloks to enable these features.

Figure 2-12 A. Software Options Screen

2-15A Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

This page intentionally left blank

Rev. L 2-15B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.5 Service Dump Notebook


Touch the Service Dump key at the bottom of the screen to display the Service
Dump Notebook shown in Figure 2-13. Tabs are displayed for each pod, and for
the Narkomed 6000. Touching each tab of the service dump notebook will
display dump data for the corresponding page.

Touch the PRINT DUMP key to print out the data on the strip chart recorder. If
there is no strip chart recorder on the machine, then touching the PRINT
DUMP key will write the data to a file on the hard drive of the NM6000.

To clear the service dump, enter the advanced service menu, then touch the
CLEAR DUMP key to clear the service dump data for that page.

Touching the POD LOG button causes the pod log screen to be displayed in the
same area as the service log. See next page.

Figure 2-13. Service Dump Notebook

2-16 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.5.1 Pod Log Screens

While the NM6000 is obtaining the service log, a progress bar is displayed
and an ABORT REFRESH button is enabled. Pressing this button will
cause the NM6000 to stop acquiring the service log from the pod.

Figure 2-13A. Pod log download screen

When all entries are obtained (or refresh is aborted), the ABORT
REFRESH button becomes the REFRESH BUTTON, and the SAVE,
PRINT, CLEAR and OK buttons appear.

Figure 2-13B. Pod log screen

Rev. F 2-16A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Pressing the REFRESH button will cause the NM6000 to obtain the log from
the pod again. When the SAVE button is pressed, the pod service log is saved to
a file according to pod type:
GAP: c:\nad\datfiles\podlog_gap.txt VPO: c:\nad\datfiles\podlog_vpo.txt

The pod service log is saved as an ASCII file with a header followed by service
log entries each on a separate line. The header contains the type of pod, date
and time log was saved, pod serial number, version and CRC for the BOOT
PROM, PBS and application, NM6000 serial number, version and CRC. Each
log entry contains the date and time, parameter value, and text:

SERVICE POD LOG FOR THE VPO POD


DATE: 9-22-1999 TIME: 10:48:23
POD SERIAL NUMBER: NNNNNNNN
BOOT PROM VERSION: 1.01 CRC: 7295
POD BASE VERSION: 1.02 CRC: 4EDF
APPLICATION VERSION: DEV1 CRC: 8D00
NM6000 SERIAL NUMBER: 145
NM6000 VERSION: 0.0 CRC: FFFF
--------------------------------------------------
09-22-99 10:36 007C8D4C PB01 System time set
09-22-99 10:14 00F00104 VP42 O2 CAL zero
09-22-99 10:14 08BD09E9 VP42 O2 CAL gain
09-22-99 10:07 00000000 VP44 Sensor Disconnect

The CLEAR button is enabled when you are in the Advanced Access mode.
Pressing this button clears the pod log. Pressing the OK button removes the pod
service log screen. While the pod service log is displayed, the soft keys and
numeric boxes are disabled. If an entry under the ID column is pressed, the
following dialog box is displayed:
Do you want to display events with ID VPXX?

The VPxx in the title corresponds to the ID of the entry that was pressed. If YES
is pressed, the displayed service log contains only entries with the selected ID. If
an entry is pressed under any column other than ID, that entry is displayed in
blue. The entry is then marked with * in the saved text.

2-16B Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.6 Service Log


Press the Service Log key at the bottom of the screen to display the service log.
Initially, a blank page appears as shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14. Service Log Initial Screen

Press the Refresh button to bring up the service log as shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15. Service Log

Rev. F 2-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Error events are displayed in red, warning events appear in yellow, and
information events are in white. Pressing the Save button will save the service
log to the hard drive for later retrieval.

Several Filter keys are displayed with the service log. When the Filter Date key
is pressed, a filter date window appears which allows you to select only the
events by date that you want to display. Press the OK button to display those
events.

Pressing the Filter Source and Category button brings up a window that allows
you to select the source (SysOneMgr, etc.) and display any or all categories of
error, warnings or information events. Press the OK button to display those
events. If you press the RESET button on this window, all sources and
categories are displayed.

Pressing the Filter ID button brings up a window that allows you to display
events by ID number. Press the ALL button; it then becomes blank. Enter the
desired ID using the number buttons. That number will then appear on the
blank button. Press the OK button to display those selected events.

NOTE: the Clear key is active only if you are in the Advanced service mode.
When you press this key, a dialog box “Do you really want to clear the service
log?” appears. If you press the Yes button, the service log will be cleared.

2.6.1 Save Service Log window


When the LOCAL SAVE button is pressed, the service log is saved to the
file c:\nad\datfiles\slog.txt. All buttons on this window are disabled
while the service log is being saved.

Figure 2-15A. Save Service Log window

2-18 Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

When the Computer button is pressed, a software keyboard is displayed


that allows you to change the computer name. You can also select from
the last five computer names entered. The default computer name is
SRVLAP.

When the Folder button is pressed, a software keyboard is displayed that


allows you to change the folder name. You can also select from the last
five folder names entered. The default folder name is NAD Software.

When the REMOTE SAVE button is pressed, all buttons on the SAVE
SERVICE LOG window are disabled. If the NM6000 is unable to find the
remote computer, an error message is displayed, the buttons are enabled,
and no further processing occurs. If the remote computer is found, the
NM6000 attempts to create a directory in the format \\computer
name\folder name\nm6k\SNXXXXXXXX. The NM6000 will then copy
all the files from the c:\nad\datfiles directory and the NT event file
APPEVENT.EVT to the remote location. The NM6000 will then save the
current service log to the remote location using the name
slog_date_time.txt where the date and time will be replaced with the
current date and time. If the NM6000 is unable to copy the files, an error
message is displayed and the buttons are enabled.If the service log is
successfully saved, a message that contains the path and name of the
saved service log will be displayed and the buttons will be enabled.

The saved service log is an ASCII text file in the line format
date time~source name of event~category~event ID~event
type~description~data.

Each line is a separate event log entry. Most entries will contain no data.

Rev. F 2-18A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.6A Service Log Entry Detail


Software Version 1.05 adds the following Service Log Entry Detail window. If a
service log entry is pressed while the log keys are enabled, this window is
displayed, showing detailed information about the currently selected event. The
selected event will be highlighted in blue in the event log. A box on this window
displays the following:
ERROR in red for error events
WARNING in yellow for warning events
INFORMATION in white for informational events

Figure 2-15B. Service Log Entry Detail window

Pressing the Previous button causes the previous event to be higlighted in blue
on the service log, and the information for the previous event is displayed in the
Service Log Entry Detail window. The last selected entry returns to its
appropriate color. Pressing the Previous button for the most recent entry causes
no changes.

Pressing the Next button causes the next event to be highlighted in blue on the
service log, and the information for the next event is displayed in the Service
Log Entry Detail window. The last selected entry returns to its appropriate
color. Pressing the Next button for the oldest entry causes no changes.

Pressing the Close button removes the Service Log Entry Detail window, and
the last selected entry in the service log returns to its appropriate color.

2-18B Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7 NM6000 Event Log Transfer Using Service Laptop with Windows 95 or 98
The following procedure allows the Narkomed 6000’s event log and POD logs to
be downloaded to a service laptop using either Windows 95 or 98 operating
system. The logs are saved to the laptop’s hard drive NM6K folder for
subsequent analysis. (Refer to Section 2.7A if using a service laptop with
Windows NT operating system.) The following items are needed:

--Service laptop computer, IBM PC or compatible with:


Type II or larger PCMCIA slots
500 MB hard drive minimum
Windows 95 or 98
Etherlink card configured to share files
--Vitalan cable P/N 4113989-001

2.7.1 Configure the laptop as shown in Figure 2-16.


2.7.2 With the Narkomed 6000 System Power switch at STANDBY and the
laptop computer Off, connect the laptop’s etherlink cable to any Vitalbus
port on the Hub. See Figure 2-17.
2.7.3 Power up the laptop computer and the NM6000. Press the Divan
Standby key to cancel the ventilator self-test, and wait for the power up
diagnostics to finish. Verify the green LED on the Lancard cable is
illuminated. (If the laptop computer prompts for a password, select
Cancel.)
2.7.4 Press the Setup key and select the About tab on the About System
Software notebook. Enter the primary service menu code and select OK
on the Service Mode screen to enter the USER ACCESS service mode.
2.7.5 Under the Service Mode screen select the NM6000 tab and enter the
advanced service code to enter the ADVANCED ACCESS mode.
2.7.6 Press the Service Config key and select the SERVICE key. Using the
NM6000 on-screen keyboard, enter your service ID number then press
OK.
2.7.7 Press the Service Log key to call up the service event log.
2.7.8 Press the Refresh key to refresh the logs. During this activity the Save
key text will turn gray. When the Save key turns black again, press the
Save key to bring up the SAVE SERVICE LOG dialog.
2.7.9 If the laptop computer name is not SRVLAP or the desired folder is not
NAD Software, touch these keys to make the required edits.
2.7.10 Press the REMOTE SAVE button. If the NM6000 is unable to find the
remote computer, an error message is displayed. If the remote computer
is found, the NM6000 attempts to create a directory in the format
\\computer name ‘SRVLAP’\folder name ‘NAD
Software’\nm6k\SNXXXXXXXX.

Rev. K 2-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

1. Turn on the laptop if necessary 20. Press OK, and press OK again to exit the
Network dialog box.
Install the Drivers
21. Ensure that the directory “NAD
2. Ensure that the Ethernet card and driver
Software”\NM6K exists on the C:\ drive.
are installed.
22. Right click the “NAD Software” directory.
Set the Computer Name and IP Address
3. Select “Start->Programs->Windows 23. Select the “Sharing” menu item.
Explorer” from the task bar.
24. Select the “Sharing” tab.
4. Right click “Network Neighborhood”
25. Select the “Share As...” radio button.
5. Select the PROPERTIES button.
26. Ensure that “NAD Software appears as
6. Select the “Identification” tab. the share name.

7. Enter the following data (as necessary): 27. Select the “Full” Access type radio button.
Computer Name: srvlap
Work Group: Service 28. Press APPLY, then OK.

8. Select the “Configuration” tab. Turn off the Dial-Up modem (if applicable)
29. Right click “My Computer:”
9. Select the “TCP/IP” item (looks like an
electrical plug). 30. Select the Properties menu item.
10. Press the “Properties” button. 31. Select the “Device Manager” tab.
11. Select the “IP Address” tab. 32. Expand “Network Adapters” by clicking
the “+” box on the line.
12. Select the “Specify an IP address” radio
button. 33. Select the Dial-up adapter.
13. Set the following fields: 34. Select the PROPERTIES button.
IP Address: 172.28.0.130
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 35. Ensure that “Disable in this hardware
profile” is checked.
14. Press OK.
36. Press OK.
Share the directories
15. Select the “Access Control” tab. Clean up and Reboot
37. Close all open windows.
16. Select the “Share-level access control” radio
button. 38. Select “Start->Shut Down” from the task
bar.
17. Select the “Configuration” tab.
39. In the “Shut Down Windows” dialog box,
18. Click on “File and Print Sharing” button. select “Restart the Computer?”
19. Select the “I want to be able to give others 40. Press “Yes”; allow several minutes for the
access to my files” item. system to reboot.

Figure 2-16. Configuring the Windows 95, 98 Laptop

2-20 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

SV00368

Figure 2-17. Connections for Windows 95, 98 Event Log Transfer

Rev. K 2-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7.11 After successful completion of an Event Log transfer, the file will be
located on the laptop computer as shown in Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18. Laptop Computer File Example

2.7.12 Verify the fourteen files transferred properly to the laptopo and forward
the files to DMI’s Technical Support Department for further analysis.
NOTE: The Appevent.evt, Slog.txt, and Slog_xxxxxxxx_xxxxxx.txt files
must each contain at least 100KB of data.

2-22 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Figure 2-19. Deleted

Figure 2-20. Deleted

Figure 2-21. Deleted

Rev. K 2-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7A NM6000 Event Log Transfer Using Service Laptop with Windows NT
The following procedure allows the Narkomed 6000’s event log and POD logs to
be downloaded to a service laptop using Windows NT operating system. The logs
are saved to the laptop’s hard drive NM6K folder for subsequent analysis. (Refer
to Section 2.7 if using a service laptop with Windows 95 or 98 operating system.)
The following items are needed:

--Service laptop computer, IBM PC or compatible with:


Type II or larger PCMCIA slots
500 MB hard drive minimum
Windows NT
Etherlink card configured to share files
--Vitalan cable P/N 4113989-002

2.7A.1 With the Narkomed 6000 System Power switch set to STANDBY and
the laptop computer Off, connect the laptop’s etherlink cable to any
Vitalbus port on the Hub as shown in Figure 2-21A.

SV00368

Figure 2-21A. Connections for Windows NT Event Log Transfer

2-23A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7A.2 Power up the laptop computer and the NM6000. Press the Divan
Standby key to cancel the ventilator self test. When prompted for a
network password, enter “password” and wait for the power up
diagnostics to finish.

Verify the network workgroup. If unknown, this information can be


found as follows: From the Windows NT desktop: right click on Network
Neighborhood; select Priorities, select the Identification tab. The
workgroup will be listed in one of the text boxes displayed. If the
workgroup is not “Goldisk”, use procedure 2.7B. It is also highly
recommended that you contact your information systems admistrator to
make the necessary changes to the laptop. (To work correctly, workgroup
must be “Goldisk”, administrator password must be “NAD123NAD123”)

2.7A.3 Verify the computer name for the laptop; ie: SRVLAP028. See Figure 2-
21B. If unknown, this information can be found as follows:
From the Windows NT Desktop:
-- Right-click on Network Neighborhood
-- Select Properties
-- Select the Identification tab
-- The computer name will be listed in one of the text boxes displayed

Figure 2-21B. Computer Name Identification Screen

Rev. L 2-23B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7A.4 Verify the laptop TCP/IP address is updated to communicate with the
NM6000. If unknown, this information can be found as follows:

-- From the Network dialog in Figure 2-21B, click on the Protocols tab.
--A dialog window shall appear as in Figure 2-21C

Figure 2-21C. Protocols Tab

-- Click once on the TCP/IP Protocol entry in the list of Network


Protocols.
-- Click the Properties button
-- A dialog shall appear as in Figure 2-21D.
--Using the drop down arrow, select the correct Ethernet adapter.

2-23C Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Figure 2-21D. TCP/IP Properties

-- Select Specify an IP address radio button


-- Enter the above shown IP Address (after entering the second set of IP
address numbers, use the space bar to advance to the third and fourth
sets.)
-- Enter the above shown Subnet Mask
-- Select OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog window
NOTE: If the MS loop adapter interferes with the proper operation of
the TCP/IP adapter, contact your IS administrator.
-- Select OK to close the Network dialog window
-- Shut down and restart the laptop computer for the new Network
settings to take effect. (When prompted for a password, enter
“password”)

Rev. K 2-23D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7A.5 Verify the laptop file folders are configured to share with the NM6000. If
unknown, this information can be found as follows:
-- Right-click the Start key
-- Select Explorer
-- At the (C:) select the NAD Software folder (with a hand under it). If
none is present, create it:
File...New...Folder, name it NAD Software
-- If a hand was not under the NAD Software folder, modify it:
Right-click (ALT + ENTER) Sharing, select Shared As,
Permission, Type, Full Control, OK, Apply, OK
You should now see a hand under the NAD Software folder as shown in Figure
2-21E

Figure 2-21E. NAD Software Folder

-- Select NM6K folder. If none is present, create it:


Select NAD Software, File...New...Folder, name it NM6K

2-23E Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7A.6 On the NM6000, press the Setup key and select the About tab on the
About SystemSoftware notebook. Enter the primary service menu code
and select OK on the Service Mode screen to enter the USER ACCESS
service mode.

2.7A.7 Under the Service Mode screen select the NM6000 tab and enter the
advanced service code to enter the ADVANCED ACCESS mode.

2.7A.8 Press the Service Config key and select the SERVICE key. Using the
NM6000 on-screen keyboard, enter your service ID number, then press
OK.

2.7A.9 Press the Service Log key to call up the service event log.

2.7A.10 Press the Refresh key to refresh the logs. During this activity the Save
key text will turn gray. When the Save key text turns black again, press
the Save key to call up the SAVE SERVICE LOG dialog.

2.7A.11 If the Laptop computer name is not SRVLAP028 or the desired folder is
not NAD Software, touch these keys and make the required edits.

2.7A.12 Press the REMOTE SAVE button. If the NM6000 is unable to find the
remote computer, an error message is displayed. If the remote computer
is found, the NM6000 attempts to create a directory in the format
\\computer name’SRVLAP’\folder name ‘NAD
Software’\nm6k\SNXXXXXXXX. (The S/N listing is derived from the
NM6000 CONFIGURATION page.)

Rev. K 2-23F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7A.13 After successful completion of an Event Log transfer, the file will be
located on the laptop computer as shown in Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-21F. Laptop Computer File Example

2.7A.14 Verify the fourteen files transferred properly to the laptopo and forward
the files to DMI’s Technical Support Department for further analysis.

NOTE: The Appevent.evt, Slog.txt, and Slog_xxxxxxxx_xxxxxx.txt files


must each contain at least 100KB of data.

2-23G Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7B. Event Log Transfer: Alternate Procedure


2.7B.1 Verify the computer name of the laptop, ie: SRVLAP028. See Figure 2-
21G. If unknown, this information can be found as follows:
From the Windows NT Desktop:
-- Right-click on Network Neighborhood
-- Select Properties
-- Select the Identification tab
-- The computer name will be listed in one of the text boxes displayed

Figure 2-21G. Computer Name Identification Screen

2.7B.2 Update the TCP/IP address to communicate with the NM6000.


-- From the Network dialog in Figure 2-21G, click on the Protocols tab.
-- A dialog window shall appear as in Figure 2-21H.

Rev. L 2-23H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Figure 2-21H. Protocols Tab

-- Click once on the TCP/IP Protocol entry in the list of Network


Protocols.
-- Click the Properties button
-- A dialog shall appear as in Figure 2-21J.

2-23J Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Figure 2-21J. TCP/IP Properties

-- Select Specify an IP address radio button


-- Enter the above shown IP Address (after entering the second set of IP
address numbers, use the space bar to advance to the third and fourth
sets.)
-- Enter the above shown Subnet Mask
-- Select OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog window
-- Select OK to close the Network dialog window
-- Shut down and restart the laptop computer for the new Network
settings to take effect.

Rev. L 2-23K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7B.3 Configuring the Laptop:


On the Laptop computer:

-- Right-click the Start key


-- Select Explorer
-- At the (C:) select NAD Software folder (with a hand under it). If none is
present, create it:
File...New...Folder, name it NAD Software
-- If a hand was not under the NAD Software folder, modify it:
Right-click (ALT + ENTER) Sharing, select Shared As,
Permission, Type, Full Control, Apply, OK
-- Select NM6K folder. If none is present, create it:
File...New...Folder, name it NM6K
-- Select the Event Log folder. If none is present, create it:
File...New...Folder, name it Event Log
You should now see a hand under the NAD Software folder as shown in Figure
2-21K.

Figure 2-21K. Shared Event Folder

2-23L Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7B.4 Turn the Narkomed 6000 System Power switch to ON. Allow the system
to complete its power up self diagnostic tests, then press Ctrl+F9,
Alt+F9, and Ctrl-ESC on the NM6K keyboard to call up the Start menu.
NOTE: Use the Arrow and Tab keys to navigate through the selections.
-- Select Start...Find File or Folders
-- Look in: My Computer
-- In the Named list: select AppEvent.evt. If the dropdown window is
empty, type in AppEvent.evt. See Figure 2-21L.
-- Select Find Now
-- Verify that the file is highlighted and press Ctrl+C to copy the file.
-- Click on the X at the top right to close the Find window.

Figure 2-21L. Find AppEvent.evt Screen

-- Press the Window key or Ctrl+Esc to bring up the task bar.


-- Type R for Run
-- In the Open list: select \\SRVLAP028, then select OK. If the
dropdown window is empty, type in \\SRVLAP028.
NOTE: If the computer name is not SRVLAP028, type in \\ followed by
the appropriate name as previously identified.
-- Select OK

Figure 2-21M. Run Box

Rev. L 2-23M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.7B.5 A Network Password window should soon appear indicating an


incorrect user name or password. This is normal. Enter the computer’s
name (SRVLAP028) in the Connect As: field by removing the “\\”
portion of this listed field and enter the word “password” in the
Password field. Press the Enter key.
NOTE: If the host NM6000 cannot locate the networked laptop computer,
recheck the laptop’s configuration setting.

Figure 2-21N. Network Password

2.7B.6 A window should appear on the NM6000 showing all shared folders on
the laptop, as identified with a hand under the folder. If no shared
folders appear, recheck the selections made in the Configuring the
Laptop section.
-- Open the EventLog Folder (SRVLAP028\NAD
Software\NM6K\Eventlog)
-- Press CTRL+V to paste the file to the laptop.
-- Verify that the AppEvent.evt file appears on the NM6000 screen.
-- Select the AppEvent.evt file.
-- Select File, Rename, move the cursor to the left of the file name and
key in the 5-digit NM6000 serial number followed by a space.
-- Press Enter
-- Close all open windows
Verify the file transferred properly to the laptop, and forward the file to DMI’s
technical support department.

NOTE: The Appevent.evt file must contain at least 100 kB of data.

2-23N Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.7B.7 Restoring your original Laptop Computer’s Network settings


After you have successfully obtained the NM6000 NT Event log, it is necessary
to restore your original laptop Network settings.

From the Windows NT Desktop:


-- Right-click on Network Neighborhood
-- Select Properties
-- Select the Protocols tab.

Figure 2-21P. Computer Name Identification Screen

Rev. L 2-23P
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Figure 2-21R. Network Protocols tab

-- Click once on the TCP/IP Protocol entry in the list of Network


Protocols.
-- Click on the Properties button
-- A dialog window shall appear as in Figure 2-21S.

2-23R Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Figure 2-21S. Microsoft TCP/IP Properties

-- Select Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server radio button. Select


Yes at the Microsoft TCP/IP DHCP protocol dialog box.
-- Select OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog window
-- Select OK to close the Network dialog window
-- Shut down and restart your computer for the new Network settings to
take effect

Figure 2-21T. Microsoft TCP/IP DHCP Protocol

2-23S
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.8 Divan Ventilator Power-Up Self Test


Upon system power-up from a cold start, the Divan ventilator enters an
automatic self test sequence that takes approximately five minutes to complete.
A flow chart of the self test sequence is shown beginning on the next page. The
test proceeds according to the following schedule:

Electronic tests including all front panel LEDs, solenoids, fan, audible alarms
Prompts to set fresh gas flow to zero, APL valve to 30, close Y-piece
Pressure sensors automatic zero calibration
Power supply voltage tests (four voltages).
Piston position and motor current check
Control pressure test
Pneumatic leakage test on breathing system, and compliance correction
Pneumatic leakage test on fresh gas system
APL valve check

When the self test is completed the Divan display will indicate Standby Mode.

If the machine is shut down and then powered up within four minutes (warm
start), the ventilator will skip some of the self tests and proceed to the Standby
Mode.

On a cold start, the power-up self test routine can be bypassed if it is desired to
proceed with operation immediately. In this case, depending upon where in the
sequence the test is interrupted, previously stored values will be substituted for
those elements of the test that are skipped.

The self test can be bypassed by pressing the Man/Spontaneous or the Volume
Mode key. The self test can be bypassed in this manner up to ten consecutive
times. When the machine is powered up the next time and allowed to complete
its self test, the counter is reset to zero. If a bypass is attempted an 11th time,
the display will indicate that the ventilator is in Safe Mode and only manual
ventilation is then possible.

The Divan ventilator also has a service mode, described on subsequent pages,
that allows you to perform some of these tests manually.

2-24 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

START Flow chart of Divan ventilator self test


SEQUENCE TEST Legend:

A Display in dialog window of ventilator

1/2 I SELF-TEST Indicated faults must be remedied.


F
Instructions and advisories observed.

VARIOUS ELECTRICAL TESTS I


Information in dialog window of ventilator
o Press rotary control
MAKE CONTACT WITH
Correspondingly numbered test blocks in VT
SYSTEM MONITOR #
window

A FRESH GAS OFF? o

A APL = 30 CM H2O? o

A Y-PIECE OPEN? o

TEST OPERATING CONTROL PRESSURE A PISTON SEAL LEAK F o

A SUPPLY PRESSURE? F o

A CONT. PRESS. LOW? F o

A SERVICE 120 o

NO PISTON MOTION OR o
CHECK PISTON A SUBSYSTEM 2 LEAK? F

A REMOVE PISTON o

A INSERT PISTON o

CONTINUED CONTINUED

Rev. K 2-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

ZERO PRESSURE SENSOR A Y-PIECE OPEN? F o

A P-SENSOR FAULT F o

A SCAVENGER FAIL F o

A Y-PIECE OCCLUDED? o

4/5 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL TESTS

6 POSITION PISTON A CONT. PRESS. LOW F

A PISTON SEAL LEAK F o

CONTROL PRESSURE TEST A BREATH SYS LOCK? F o

A SERVICE 118 o

A SERVICE 119 o

7
A SERVICE 115 o

VALVE AND ROLLER A VALVE DISK FAIL F o


DIAPHRAGM TEST

A PISTON SEAL LEAK F o

CONTINUED CONTINUED

2-26 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

>1.5L/MIN
SUBSYSTEM 1 / 2 A SUBSYSTEM 1 / 2 LEAK F o
LEAK<1.5 L/MIN AT
30 mBAR
A INSP VALVE? F o

I LEAKTEST V MODE A SUBSYSTEM 1 LEAK F o

A SUBSYSTEM 2 LEAK F o
o F

A FRESH GAS OFF?


8

o F

A LEAKAGE >10 L/MIN

A INSP. VALVE? F o

A SUBSYS. 1 LEAK F o
LEAK = [ ] ML/MIN A RERUN LEAK TEST?
A
o o LEAK ACCEPTED?
<175 >175 A SUBSYS 2 LEAK F

CONTINUED CONTINUED

Rev. B 2-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

I LEAKTEST, MANUAL

o F
9
BAG/FR GAS HOSE OR SUBSYSTEM 3 SUBSYS 3 LEAK o o
A A
SUBSYSTEM 3 LEAK
(BREATHING BAG/

o FRESH GAS LINE)


F
LEAK <300 ML/MIN
AT 30 MBAR A RERUN LEAK TEST?
A FRESH GAS OFF?
LEAK ACCEPTED?
A MANUAL LEAK = [ ] F

o F o BREATHING SYSTEM
A FRESH GAS OFF? F o
TEST VALVE FUNCTION
SCAVENGER FAIL OR
A
BREATH SYS. FAIL
A INSP. VALVE? F o

A APL = 30 CM H2O? F o

A APL = è MAN? F o

A SUBSYS 1 / 2 LEAK F o

10 END OF SELF TEST I STANDBY

2-28 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.9 Divan Service Mode


The service mode allows several ventilator functions to be manually tested as
described in the following paragraphs.

To activate the service mode, first turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
Press and hold the hidden keys shown in Figure 2-22. While holding these
keys, turn the System Power switch to ON. The Divan display will then indicate
SERVICE MODE as shown in the illustration.

HIDDEN KEYS

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume
Mode
SERVICE MODE
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV V Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset T Flow Rate

SV00167

Figure 2-22. Divan Ventilator Control Panel

About the rotary knob:

The rotary knob on the ventilator control panel has two modes:

1. It is used to scroll through the list of tests available in the service menu, in
order to make a selection.

2. It is used to scroll within a selected test, when applicable.

You must press the knob to toggle from one mode to the other. There are some
exceptions - where the display returns to the service menu automatically at the
end of a test. These exceptions are noted where they apply in the following
paragraphs.

The tests described in the following paragraphs are listed in the order that they
appear in the service menu.

You can exit the Divan Service Mode at any time by turning the Narkomed 6000
System Power switch to STANDBY.

Rev. B 2-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.1 Service Log


With the ventilator in Service Mode, press the rotary knob once and turn
the knob until LOGBOOK is displayed as shown in Figure 2-23. Press
the knob again to display the log entries.

Turn the rotary knob to scroll through the service log. Each line is
displayed in memory address, decimal format and hexadecimal format as
shown in the illustration. Turning the knob clockwise scrolls backward
in time; turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls forward to the most
recent entry. (The address of the last error entered is 0000.) A list of
common error codes is shown in Table 2-1.

NOTE: When an error code is displayed with a decimal number greater


than 500, you must subtract 500 from the displayed number to
get the correct error code.

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume
Mode
LOGBOOK
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV V Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset T Flow Rate

SV00168

ERROR LOG DISPLAY: [AAAA] XXX YYH

ERROR CODE IN
HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
MEMORY ADDRESS IN ERROR CODE IN
HEXADECIMAL FORMAT DECIMAL FORMAT

Figure 2-23. Service Log Display

2-30 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Clearing the error log:

To clear the error log, set the 3rd DIP switch on the ADDA PCB (center
board in the electronics compartment below the cover plate) to the
DOWN position, and press the Pmax key.

After clearing the error log, return the dip switch to the UP position to
allow correct operation of the ventilator.

TOP VIEW OF DIVAN


PCB COMPARTMENT WITH
COVER PLATE REMOVED

CPU2 ADDA CPU1

DIP SWITCHES

Rev. B 2-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Table 2-1: Divan Error List

Dec Hex Fault

001 01 Port module on CPU 2 PCB faulty

002 02 Bar graph or actuation on front panel faulty

003 03 Alphanumeric display, alphanumeric display PCB or front panel PCB faulty

004 04 Key LED faulty

006 06 Front Panel potentiometer faulty

007/008 07 Pressure sensor 1 outside tolerance, value too low with respect to PE2

009/010 09 Pressure sensor 2 outside tolerance, value too low with respect to PE1

012/013 0C Pressure sensor 3 outside tolerance

014 0E Release signal not recognized

015 0F Motor relay not recognized

016 10 Solenoid valve faulty

018 12 Faulty ram on CPU 1

020 14 Faulty RAM on CPU 2

021 15 Faulty RTC on CPU Standard

022 16 Serial interface module on CPU 1

023 17 Serial interface; DCD and/or DTR faulty

024 18 Faulty PEEP valve

027 1B Incorrect analog values on ADDA PCB

028 1C Faulty timer on CPU 1

031 1F Incorrect motor current

032 20 Piston slide not attached to drive belt

033 21 Incorrect motor setpoint

034 22 Setpoint too high with piston positioning

039 27 Mech. stop with piston positioning

043 2B Incorrect powerfail signals

044 2C Faulty horn on motherboard.

046 2E Faulty Fan

049 31 Faulty motor control

050 32 Failure of sync. signal

2-32 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Table 2-1: Divan Error List

Dec Hex Fault

057 39 9V rechargeable battery flat

059 3B Failure of motor control monitoring

061 3D Failure of CPU 1 voltage monitoring

062 3E Fault in ADDA supply voltage

063 3F Incorrect piston movement

070 46 Incorrect monitoring software

071 47 Unauthorized test termination

084 54 Undefined error

087 57 Excessive motor current

088 58 Excessive deviation

089 59 Failure of supply voltage

090 5A Incorrect motor actual value

091 5B Failure of mains supply

094 5E Port module on ADDA PCB faulty

095 5F Piston cannot be moved

096 60 Oscillator failure

097 61 Testing of bifurcated light barrier not OK

099 63 Deviation between pressure sensors 1 and 2

100 64 Leak in double roller diaphragm

105 69 Valve V1 cannot be opened

106 6A Valve V2 cannot be opened

107 6B Valve V3 cannot be opened

108 6C V6 cannot be opened or PEEP valve faulty

109 6D V6 cannot be closed or PEEP valve faulty

111 6F Faulty ancillary air valve or V2

112 70 Leak in area between MV1 and V1

113 71 Leak in area between MV2 and V2

114 72 Leak in area between MV3 and V3

115 73 Leak in area between MV4 and metering unit

Rev. K 2-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

Table 2-1: Divan Error List

Dec Hex Fault

117 75 V1, V2, V3 or Y-piece not closed

118 76 Test control pressure outside tolerance

119 77 Test control pressure too high

120 78 Operating control pressure too high

121 79 APL valve faulty

122 7A Operating control pressure between 40 and 70 mbar

124 7C Clogged microfilters

125 7E Unexpected hardware reset

200 C8 Communication problem between CPU 1 and CPU 2

201 C9 CPU 1 - CPU 2 transmission error

202 CA No monitoring function

203 CB Failure of CPU 2 horn actuation

204 CC CPU 2 cannot operate motor driver

205 CD CPU 2 cannot operate motor relay

206 CE CPU 2 cannot switch off valves

207 CF Faulty hardware watchdog on CPU 2

210 D2 No monitoring of analog data on CPU 2

211 D3 Faulty RAM on CPU 2 PCB

212 D4 Faulty EPROM on CPU 2

213 D5 Different system clock between CPU 1 and CPU 2

214 D6 Powerfail signal not plausible (CPU 2)

215 D7 Pressure zero values on CPU 2 outside range

216 D8 CPU 2 signals incorrect piston positioning

217 D9 CPU 2 signals incorrect pressure measurement

218 DA CPU 2 signals faulty solenoid valve

219 DB No response to CPU 2 checksum

220 DC Background cycle time of CPU 2 too long

221 DD Incorrect calculation of adjustment parameters

222 DE Incorrect VT input following compliance correction

2-34 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Table 2-1: Divan Error List

Dec Hex Fault

223 DF Reverse flow measurement outside normal time period

224 E0 Background cycle time of CPU 1 too long

225 E1 Incorrect status of mains switch

246 F6 Invalid mode change

247 F7 Text EPROM cannot be addressed

248 F8 No activation of modules for Timer 2

249 F9 No activation of modules for Timer 1

251 FB No CPU 1 checksum

252 FC Incorrect CPU 1 checksum

253 FD Adjustment data outside valid range

254 FE Software operation in incorrect sequence

NOTE: When an error code is displayed with a decimal number greater than 500, you must subtract
500 from the displayed number to get the correct error code.

Rev. B 2-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.2 Removal Position


This function sets the position of the piston so that the piston-cylinder
unit can be easily removed from the ventilator. This position may need to
be re-established after servicing the piston-cylinder unit or after
changing the battery on the CPU board.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
removal pos. is displayed.

Press the knob again to display ADJUST PISTON as shown in Figure 2-


24. A bar graph representing the piston position is displayed as shown
in the illustration. The correct piston removal position occurs when the
left half or less of the bar graph is lighted, and the piston-cylinder unit is
easily removed. Several trials may be needed to find the optimum
removal position. Turn the knob clockwise to move the piston forward,
counter-clockwise to move the piston backward. When the piston is in
the correct position, press the knob to store this position for subsequent
operation.

BAR GRAPH DISPLAY

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume
Mode
ADJUST PISTON
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV V Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset T Flow Rate

SV00169

Figure 2-24. Piston Position Display

2-36 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.9.3 Language Selection


Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
select lang. is displayed.

Press the knob again and verify that US. version xx.xx is displayed.

Make the correct selection by turning the knob, if needed.

2.9.4 System Selection


Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
select system is displayed.

Press the knob again and verify that CICERO EM is displayed.

Make the correct selection by turning the knob, if needed.

2.9.5 Volume Adjustment


This function sets the minimum tidal volume of the ventilator. It should
be set to 10 mL. This value is usually factory set and is stored in memory.
If it needs to be changed, the RAM must be removed from CPU2 for 30
seconds to erase the memory.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
volume version is displayed.

Press the knob again and verify that 10 mL is displayed.

Rev. B 2-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.6 Total Hours


This function displays total machine operating hours, and provides a
method for changing the displayed hours if needed.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
total hours is displayed. The display will then appear as shown in
Figure 2-25. The hours appear above the Vt and Rate keys.

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume 888 88 Pmax sets 00000


Mode
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV VT Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset Flow Rate

SV00170

Rate I:E
% I.P.
Flow
PEEP
SIMV
Rate USE THESE KEYS TO
10,000s 1,000s 100s 10s 1s ADJUST DISPLAYED HOURS

Figure 2-25. Hours Display

To alter the displayed hours:

• Set the 3rd DIP switch on the ADDA PCB (center board in the
electronics compartment below the cover plate) to the DOWN position.

SU00202

TOP VIEW OF DIVAN


PCB COMPARTMENT WITH
COVER PLATE REMOVED

CPU2 ADDA CPU1

DIP SWITCHES

2-38 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

• Set the desired display by using the keys shown in the illustration that
correspond to the digit(s) you are changing.
• Press the Pmax key to enter the new displayed hours.
• After making the new entry, return the dip switch to the UP position to
allow correct operation of the ventilator.

2.9.7 Operating Hours


This function displays the actual hours the ventilator has operated, and
does not record time in Standby Mode.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
operating hours is displayed.

Press the knob again to display the operating hours as shown in Figure
2-25.

The displayed hours can be changed in the same manner as described


above for the Total Hours.

2.9.8 Self Test


This test runs the ventilator through a self test cycle similar to the one
performed at start-up in the operating mode.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
self test ? is displayed.

Press the knob again to initiate the self test cycle.

NOTE: At completion of the test, the display automatically returns to


the service menu self test ? display. If you press the knob
again it will start another self test cycle.

You can cancel out of the test by pressing the STANDBY key on the
ventilator control panel.

Rev. B 2-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.9 Volume Mode Leak Test, Vmode (Sub-systems 1 and 2)


This test checks for leakage in the breathing system and hoses, absorber,
piston-cylinder unit, inspiration and expiration valves. To perform this
test the breathing hoses must be in place and the Y-piece closed.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
Leaktest, V mode is displayed.

Press the knob again to start the test. If the leak test is found to be
within acceptable limits, the compliance of the breathing system and
hoses in mL/mbar is shown on the Vt display. This reading must be
divided by 100 to obtain the actual value in mL/mbar.

Should a leak be detected that would affect the operation of the


ventilator, a corresponding message will be displayed. Several possible
messages are shown in Figure 2-26.

SYSTEM COMPLIANCE

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume 888 Leaktest, V mode


Mode
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV VT Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset Flow Rate

SV00171

Subsyst. 1/2 leak

Subsystem 1 leak

Subsystem 2 leak

Insp. Valve ?

Diaphragm fail / Piston fail

Figure 2-26. V Mode Leak Test Display

Rev. B 2-40 Rev. B


RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.9.10 Leak Test, Manual (Sub-systems 1, 2 and 3)


In addition to parts of the system checked in the previous test, this test
includes the bag hose and bag, fresh gas hose, flow meters, ORC and
vaporizer mounts.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
Leaktest, manual is displayed.

Press the knob again to start the test. At completion of the test, the sub-
systems leak rate is displayed in mL/min. as shown in Figure 2-27.

During this test the display may ask for confirmation of a leak location.
You will then need to correct the problem, and then press the knob to
continue.

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume
Mode
Leak = xxx mL/min
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV VT Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset Flow Rate

SV00172

Subsystem 3 leak

BAG/Fr.gas hose?

Figure 2-27. Leak Test Manual Display

Rev. B 2-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.11 Valve Test


This function allows manual operation of the solenoid valves in the
ventilator and is useful for checking control pressure at the pneumatic
interfaces.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
conf. valves is displayed.

Press the knob again to display control pressure and valve status as
shown in Figure 2-28.

The left portion of the display indicates the control pressure. Three digits
are displayed; the reading must be divided by 10 for the actual pressure.

The right portion of the display (six digits) indicates the state of the six
solenoid valves, where 0 = off, 1 = on. A schematic diagram of the
pneumatic control system is shown in Figure 2-29. In the valve test
mode, the solenoid valves are operated by the keys on the ventilator
control panel, as noted in the following table.

Control Key Valve Desig. What it controls Measure press. at

Pmax MY1 Fresh gas valve Breathing sys interface V1

Vt MY3 APL valve Breathing sys interface V3

Rate MY4

I:E MY9 Piston seal Piston interface C1

%I.P. MY2 Air inlet valve Breathing sys interface V2

PEEP MY8 O2 supply to ventilator

CONTROL PRESSURE VALVE ON/OFF STATUS

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume
Mode
XXX 000000
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV VT Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset Flow Rate

SV00173

Pmax.
THESE KEYS Pset
VT RATE I:E
% I.P.
Flow
PEEP

OPERATE
THESE VALVES MY1 MY3 MY4 MY9 MY2 MY8

Figure 2-28. Manual Solenoid Valve Control

2-42 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1,5 BAR ±0,1


AIR/O2
CONTROL 250 MBAR
PRESSURE 2L/MIN DOS 4 PEEP VALVE
±0,2 0,5L/MIN

87 MBAR
2,7 - 6 BAR
MY 8
PE 3
DOS 2
DOS 3
E
P

160 MBAR 87 MBAR MY 4

PE 2 PE 1

E E
P P
MY 9 MY 1 MY 3 MY 2
CU PM 8050CD
V1 V6 V3 V2 V7

Y1
E
O2
INSP.
FRESH GAS
A - GAS
CO2 ASPIRATOR
(PM 8050CD)

POP-OFF Y7
ABSORBER
RESERVOIR
C1 B1 BAG
MOTOR DRIVE
PEEP
V

Y3 Y2
EXP. Y6
PISTON-CYLINDER
UNIT
KZE
SPT. MAN.
APL

5-70 MBAR

CHECK AUXILIARY COMPACT BREATHING


VALVES AIR VALVE SYSTEM BREASY
SV00388

SCAVENGING
SYSTEM

Figure 2-29. Schematic Diagram of Divan Pneumatic Control System

Rev. B 2-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.12 Display of Pressure Values


This function displays the pressure values measured by the sensors in
the ventilator for airway pressure, piston pressure and control pressure.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
disp. press. Val is displayed.

Press the knob again to display the pressure values as shown in Figure
2-30.

The displayed readings must be divided by 10 for the actual pressure in


mbar.

System compliance is also shown in the Vt display. This reading must be


divided by 100 to obtain the actual value in mL/mbar.

AIRWAY PRESSURE

PISTON PRESSURE
SYSTEM
COMPLIANCE CONTROL PRESSURE

Manual/
Test
Spontaneous
0% 100%

Volume 888 XXXX YYYY ZZZZ


Mode
cmH2O mL[L] Breaths/min.

Pres. Pmax. % I.P. SIMV


SIMV VT Rate I:E PEEP Standby
Mode Pset Flow Rate

SV00174

Figure 2-30. Pressure Value Display

2-44 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.9.13 Pressure Sensor Calibration


This function calibrates pressure sensors PE1, PE2 and PE3.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
calib. sensors ? is displayed.

Press the knob again to perform the calibration.

sensors calib ! will be displayed for a second.

NOTE: Following the sensors calib! message, the display will


automatically return to the service menu.

2.9.14 Hardware I/O


Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
Hardware I/O is displayed.

Data at the parallel ports of the ADDA PCB is displayed. Turning the
knob will scroll through the addresses listed, and the corresponding
errors.

2.9.15 Moving the Piston


Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
move piston is displayed.

Press the knob again; turn the knob in each direction to test piston
movement.

The display above the Pmax key indicates the pressure at Sensor PE1.

The display above the Vt key shows motor current while the piston is
moving.

The alphanumeric display indicates piston position in hexadecimal


format Targ XXX Act YYY , where XXX is the target value and YYY is
the actual value.

Rev. B 2-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued) NM6000

2.9.16 A/D Converter


This function is used to check pressure sensor zero calibration during the
PMS Procedure given in Section 6. It is also has other diagnostic
functions, with acceptable ranges listed in the Divan documentation.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
A/D converter is displayed.

Press the knob again to display the hex values of the 2-bit A/D converter
on the ADDA PCB. Turn the knob to scroll through channels 0 thru F.

2.9.17 PEEP Valve


This test allows verification of PEEP valve operation by displaying the
pressure setpoint vs. control current.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
PEEP Valve is displayed.

Press the knob again to display Targ XX Act YY , and turn the knob
to set a pressure on the PEEP valve.

The values displayed at XX represent the PEEP pressure setpoint in


mbar. The number shown at YY is proportional to the control current
operating the PEEP valve. This number is scaled so that it should be
within one digit of the setpoint over the entire range.

2.9.18 RS232 Tests


RS232 Test Man. and RS232 Test Auto are serial interface tests
intended for use with a Drägerwerk monitor and do not apply to the
NM6000.

2.9.19 PC Service Mode


This function allows access to the service mode through an external PC
or service laptop. Because of the slow interface, the use of this function is
not recommended.

2-46
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

2.9.20 Select Parameter


This function is used to set the default values for the ventilation
parameters. It is recommended that these settings not be changed in the
field.

2.9.21 Display Configuration


This function allows the Divan self test display to be set on or off.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
display config. is displayed.

Press the knob again and verify that display on is shown.


This is the correct setting.

2.9.22 Standby Setting


This function sets the length of time the STANDBY key has to be held to
put the Divan into standby.

Press the knob to display the service menu, and turn it until
standby variant is displayed.

Press the knob again and verify that T = 2 Sec. is shown.


This is the correct setting.

2.9.23 Confirm Mode


The ventilator is designed with two different modes of confirming certain
changes in operating modes.

This function allows the confirmation method to be selected.

Only “Confirm R-knob” (not “Confirm Time”) is acceptable for use on the
Narkomed 6000.

2.9.24 Cancel Tests


This function sets the number of Power-up self tests that may be by-
passed. Only “Limited” is acceptable for use on the Narkomed 6000.

Rev. L 2-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

3.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains information to assist the Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified
Technical Service Representative (TSR) in locating electrical faults affecting the
Narkomed 6000 anesthesia system. Some pneumatic fault locating information is
also included in this section. Most troubleshooting efforts begin with verifying power
supply voltages. The following paragraph summarizes the voltage distribution
scheme within the machine.
3.1 Power Supply and Voltage Distribution
Test points, voltages and their allowable ranges for the Narkomed 6000 system
and Divan ventilator are given in Table 3-1. System voltage is distributed to the
CRT, flowmeter lights and table lamp. Voltage for the VPO assembly and the
gas analyzer pod is supplied via the communication port assembly. A block
diagram of the voltage distribution arrangement is shown in Figure 3-1.
Connector locations are shown in Figure 3-2.
NOTE: If the Vitalbus Hub door on the back of the machine is opened for test
purposes, be sure to reinstall the power cord as shown in Figure 3-4 when the
machine is placed back in service.

Table 3-1:

PROCESSOR VOLTAGE ACCEPTABLE RANGE


J1-3 +48 VDC 40 to 56 VDC
J1-1 Return
COMM PORT ASM VOLTAGE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
J3-2 +15.5 VDC 14.73 to 16.23 VDC
J3-6 Return
SYSTEM VOLTAGE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
J6-14 +24.5 VDC 23.23 to 25.73 VDC
J6-3 Return
VENTILATOR VOLTAGE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
J2-2 +24.5 VDC 23.23 to 25.73 VDC
J2-14 Return
J2-1 +5.1 VDC 4.95 to 5.25 VDC
J2-16 Return
J2-6 +15 VDC 14.55 to 15.45 VDC
J2-13 Return
J2-7 -15 VDC -14.55 to -15.45 VDC
J2-4 Return

Rev. K 3-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

MIN FLOW J10


CUTOFF VPO INTEGRATED
GAS PATIENT
SOLENOID ASM POD
J4 MONITORING
MODULE
J2
J2 J3
J5 J4
J10, J13
J1 VITALBUS HUB ASM

J9

PWR, HEATER
VENTILATOR
SOL

AUDIO
NETW
EXT KBD PROCESSOR
CONN KBD PWR SYS I/O
VID COM

FAN
(VITALBUS)
FLAT
PANEL CRT

CRT FAN

TABLE LAMP
& SCR ASM J2

OVERRIDE LED
INTERFACE
FLOWMETER ASSEMBLY
LIGHTS J3
O2 LOW
J1 PRESS
SWITCH
DIVAN OVERRIDE

<<
ON / STANDBY
J6 J1 J2 J3 J7

POWER SUPPLIES

CB CB CB

J5

MAINS BATTERY
CONVENIENCE
OUTLET

FIGURE 3-1. Narkomed 6000 Block Diagram (Electrical)

3-2 Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

FIGURE 3-2. Power supply connector locations on floor of machine (rear view)

Rev. K 3-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

EARLY DESIGN FOUR COM PORT

SV00394

LATER DESIGN SINGLE COM PORT

FIGURE 3-3. WPU (Processor) Connector Labeling


denotes connectors not used.

3-4 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

3.2 Battery
The battery bank comprises four 12-volt storage batteries connected in series for
a nominal backup supply of 48 V. The battery voltage is monitored by the
system, and a ‘battery low’ signal is generated if the battery voltage drops below
46.8 V (±0.5V). Battery disconnect occurs when voltage drops below 40.0 V
(±0.5V). Battery voltage can be measured at its power supply connector, J5-6 (+)
to J5-1 (-).

Power Cord Routing:


If the Vitalbus Hub door on the back of the machine is opened for test purposes,
be sure to reinstall the power cord as shown in Figure 3-4 when the machine is
placed back in service.
Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction. The
retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch diameter loop
approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus HUB door using the
mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord socket as illustrated.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

FIGURE 3-4. Power Cord Routing

Rev. K 3-4A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

3.3 Troubleshooting Guides


Table 3-2 lists common failure modes and symptoms (excluding simultaneous
multiple faults) for the monitoring and display devices, and several ventilator
functions. Each failure mode or symptom is keyed to a troubleshooting guide
flow chart at the back of this section to assist the TSR in locating a problem.
These guides assume that the machine is plugged into an AC outlet with the
correct voltage, and the machine is not running on its backup battery.

Table 3-2: Narkomed 6000 Failure Mode and Symptom List

FAILURE MODE / SYMPTOM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Loss of O2 Monitor Guide 1


Loss of Breathing Pressure Monitor Guide 2
Loss of Respiratory Monitor Guide 3
Loss of Agent Monitor Guide 4
No Audio Alarms Guide 5
Serial Port Communication Failure Guide 6
No Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarms Guide 7
CRT Blank Guide 8
Touch Screen Not Responding Guide 9
Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Not Working Guide 10
Leak Test Failure at Ventilator Start-Up Guide 11
Vapor Exclusion System Sticking Guide 12
Can’t Remove Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Unit Guide 13
Humming noise from Divan during mechanical ventilation Guide 14

3-4B Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 1: Loss of O2 Monitor

START

IS O2
MONITOR Y
WORKING
PROPERLY?

CONNECT N
SENSOR CORD
TO INTERFACE

IS
N SENSOR CORD
CONNECTED TO
INTERFACE
PANEL?

INSTALL SENSOR Y
ELEMENT
CORRECTLY

IS SENSOR REINSTALL
N ELEMENT ORIGINAL CONTACT
INSTALLED PROCESSOR ASM DRÄGERSERVICE
CORRECTLY?

N
Y
N
IS O2
MONITOR Y
WORKING Y
PERFORM AN DOES UNIT UNIT IS
PROPERLY? PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL
O2 CALIBRATION

REPLACE PROCESSOR
IS O2 AS OUTLINED IN
Y MONITOR SECTION 4 PERFORM A
WORKING COMPLETE PMS
PROPERLY? ON UNIT
N
N
IS O2
MONITOR Y
REPLACE VPO ASM WORKING
AS OUTLINED IN PROPERLY?
SECTION 4

REINSTALL ORIGINAL
IS O2 VPO ASM
MONITOR N ------------------------------
WORKING CHECK CABLES,
PROPERLY? VITALBUS HUB
ASSEMBLY
Y

3-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 2: Loss of Breathing Pressure Monitor

START

IS
PRESSURE Y
MONITOR WORKING
PROPERLY?

CHECK PILOT N
LINE
CONNECTION
AT BOTH ENDS

N IS
PILOT LINE
CONNECTED?

Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CONTACT
PROCESSOR ASM DRÄGERSERVICE

N
PERFORM A
PRESSURE N
CALIBRATION IS
PRESSURE Y Y
MONITOR WORKING DOES UNIT UNIT IS
PROPERLY? PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL

IS
Y PRESSURE
MONITOR WORKING REPLACE PROCESSOR
PROPERLY? AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4 PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
N ON UNIT
N

IS
PRESSURE Y
REPLACE VPO ASM MONITOR WORKING
AS OUTLINED IN PROPERLY?
SECTION 4

REINSTALL ORIGINAL
IS VPO ASM
PRESSURE N ------------------------------
MONITOR WORKING CHECK CABLES,
PROPERLY? VITALBUS HUB
ASSEMBLY

3-6
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 3: Loss of Respiratory Volume Monitor

START

IS
VOLUME Y
MONITOR WORKING
PROPERLY?

CONNECT N
SENSOR CORD
TO INTERFACE

IS
N SENSOR CORD
CONNECTED TO
INTERFACE
PANEL?

CHECK FLOW Y
SENSOR AND
ADAPTER

IS FLOW REINSTALL
N SENSOR ORIGINAL CONTACT
INSTALLED PROCESSOR ASM DRÄGERSERVICE
CORRECTLY

N
Y
N
IS
VOLUME Y
MONITOR WORKING Y
PERFORM A PROPERLY? DOES UNIT UNIT IS
FLOW CALIBRATION PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL

REPLACE PROCESSOR
IS AS OUTLINED IN
Y VOLUME SECTION 4 PERFORM A
MONITOR WORKING COMPLETE PMS
PROPERLY? ON UNIT
N
N
IS
VOLUME Y
REPLACE VPO ASM MONITOR WORKING
AS OUTLINED IN PROPERLY?
SECTION 4

REINSTALL ORIGINAL
IS VPO ASM
VOLUME N ------------------------------
MONITOR WORKING CHECK CABLES,
PROPERLY? VITALBUS HUB
ASSEMBLY
Y

3-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 4: Loss of Agent Monitor

START

IS CO2/
AGENT ERROR N
INDICATED ON
CRT?

CHECK SAMPLE
LINE, FILTER, Y
WATER TRAP

IS
LINE BLOCK REINSTALL ORIGINAL CONTACT
Y MSG INDICATED PROCESSOR ASM DRÄGERSERVICE
ON CRT?

Y
N N

PERFORM A IS CO2/ N
CALIBATION AS AGENT ERROR DOES UNIT UNIT IS
OUTLINED IN INDICATED ON PASS PMS? Y FUNCTIONAL
SECTION 5 CRT?

IS CO2/ REPLACE
N PERFORM A
AGENT ERROR PROCESSOR ASM
INDICATED ON AS OUTLINED IN COMPLETE PMS
CRT? SECTION 4 ON UNIT

Y Y

SUBSTITUTE IS CO2/ N
ANOTHER AGENT ERROR
GAS POD INDICATED ON
CRT?

REINSTALL
IS CO2/
Y ORIGINAL POD
AGENT ERROR ----------------------
INDICATED ON CHECK CABLES AND
CRT?
VITALBUS HUB

3-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 5: No Audio Alarms

START

ARE
ALARMS AUDIBLY Y
ANNUNCIATED?

CHECK SPEAKERS,
SPEAKER WIRING
TO VITALBUS HUB
AND PROCESSOR

ARE
Y ALARMS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?

REPLACE
VITALBUS N Y
CONTACT DOES UNIT UNIT IS
PCB ASM DRÄGERSERVICE PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL

ARE PERFORM A
Y ALARMS AUDIBLY REINSTALL
ORIGINAL COMPLETE PMS
ANNUNCIATED? ON UNIT
PROCESSOR ASM

N
N

REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VITALBUS PCB ASM ARE Y
--------------------------- ALARMS AUDIBLY
REPLACE ANNUNCIATED?
PROCESSOR ASM

3-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 6: Communication Port Failure

START

DOES
HOST FAIL TO N
COMMUNICATE WITH
PERIPHERAL

CONNECT Y
SENSOR CORD
TO INTERFACE

IS
PERIPHERAL CABLE
N CONNECTED TO COMM
PORT CONTACT
DRÄGERSERVICE

Y
N

CHECK PERIPHERAL REINSTALL Y


DEVICE AND HOST ORIGINAL DOES UNIT UNIT IS
SERIAL PORT PROCESSOR ASM PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL
CONFIG SETTINGS

DOES DOES
N N PERFORM A
HOST FAIL TO HOST FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE WITH COMMUNICATE WITH COMPLETE PMS
PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL ON UNIT

CHECK COMM PORT


INTERNAL CABLES REPLACE PROCESSOR
TO AS OUTLINED IN
PROCESSOR SECTION 4

DOES Y
HOST FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE WITH
PERIPHERAL

3-10
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 7: No Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarms

START

DOES
O2 SUPPLY Y
PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION?

CHECK SWITCH
WIRE HARNESS AND
WIRING TO SYS I/O
CONNECTOR ON
PROCESSOR
CONTACT
DRÄGERSERVICE

N
DOES REINSTALL
Y O2 SUPPLY ORIGINAL
PRESSURE ALARM PROCESSOR ASM DOES UNIT Y UNIT IS
FUNCTION? PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL

N
N

DISCONNECT SWITCH; DOES


O2 SUPPLY Y PERFORM A
TEST OPERATE AND COMPLETE PMS
CHECK SWITCH PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION? ON UNIT
CONTINUITY

RECONNECT SWITCH
IS THE N AND REPLACE
SWITCH PROCESSOR ASM
BAD? AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4

REPLACE SWITCH
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4

3-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 8: CRT Blank

START

IS CRT
BLANK UPON N
SYSTEM POWER
UP?

Y
N Y
CONTACT DOES UNIT UNIT IS
DRÄGERSERVICE PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL
CHECK POWER
TO CRT,
VIDEO CABLE

REINSTALL
ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR ASM

IS CRT
BLANK UPON N
SYSTEM POWER Y
UP?

IS CRT
Y BLANK UPON N PERFORM A
SYSTEM POWER COMPLETE PMS
UP? ON UNIT

TURN MACHINE TO STANDBY


AND DISABLE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS. TEMPORARILY
DISCONNECT VIDEO CABLE
FROM WPU AND CONNECT IT
TO VIDEO PORT OF LAPTOP
COMPUTER. RESET CIRCUIT
BREAKERS, TURN ON REPLACE
MACHINE AND LAPTOP PROCESSOR ASM
COMPUTER. AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4

IS NM6000
CRT BLANK UPON N
SYSTEM POWER
UP?

REPLACE CRT
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4 Y

IS NM6000
CRT BLANK UPON N
SYSTEM POWER
UP?

3-12 Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 9: Touch Screen Not Responding

START

IS
TOUCH SCREEN Y
RESPONSIVE?

N
N Y
CONTACT DOES UNIT UNIT IS
DRÄGERSERVICE PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL
CHECK CABLES
TO CRT FROM
PROCESSOR

REINSTALL
ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR ASM

IS
TOUCH SCREEN Y
RESPONSIVE?
N

IS
N TOUCH SCREEN Y PERFORM A
RESPONSIVE? COMPLETE PMS
ON UNIT
REPLACE CRT
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4

REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CRT
IS --------------------------
TOUCH SCREEN N
REPLACE
RESPONSIVE? PROCESSOR ASM
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4

Rev. A 3-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 10: Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Unit Not Working

START

DOES
PISTON-CYLINDER Y
UNIT OPERATE
PROPERLY?

N
LUBE SHAFT WITH
MOLYKOTE 55
(P/N 4115127)
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 7

DOES
Y PISTON-CYLINDER
UNIT GENERATE AN
EXCESSIVE AUDIBLE
HUM?

CHECK FOR LOOSE OR


DETACHED CANISTER,
PISTON, DEFECTIVE
DIAPHRAGM, LOSS
OF SEAL PRESSURE

DOES UNIT Y UNIT IS


PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL

N
DOES PERFORM A
PISTON-CYLINDER Y
COMPLETE PMS
UNIT OPERATE ON UNIT
PROPERLY?

N
CONTACT
DRÄGERSERVICE
Y
CHECK DRIVE
MECHANISM AND
ELECTRONICS DOES
---------------------------- PISTON-CYLINDER
SET PISTON UNIT OPERATE N
REMOVAL POSITION PROPERLY?
IN TEST MODE

3-14 Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 11: Leak Test Failure at Ventilator Start-up

START

DOES
VENTILATOR FAIL N
LEAK TEST?

RUN VENTILATOR IN
TEST MODE
TO DETERMINE
APPROX. LOCATION
OF LEAK

FOR IPPV LEAK TEST CHK: FOR MAN LEAK TEST CHK:
BREATHING SYS HOSES, FRESH GAS HOSE,
FLOW SENSOR, BAG HOSE AND BAG
INSP & EXP VALVES, GAS CIRCUITS IN
ABSORBER CANISTER, MACHINE
PNEUMATIC INTERFACES
AT ABSORBER SYSTEM
AND PISTON-CYL UNIT

DOES
VENTILATOR FAIL N PERFORM A DOES UNIT Y UNIT IS
LEAK TEST? COMPLETE PMS PASS PMS? FUNCTIONAL
ON UNIT

N
Y

CONTACT
DRÄGERSERVICE

3-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 12: Vapor Exclusion System Sticking

START

DOES Y
EXCL. SYSTEM
WORK
PROPERLY?

REMOVE
VAPORIZERS
FROM MACHINE PERFORM THE
FOLLOWING TESTS:

1. FRESH GAS LEAK DO Y


ALL TESTS EXCL. SYSTEM
2. VAPORIZER PASS? IS FUNCTIONAL
DOES Y ACCURACY
EXCL. SYSTEM
WORK 3. EXCLUSION
PROPERLY? SYSTEM
N

N
Y Y

LUBE SLIDE BAR


WITH DOES DO
EXCL. SYSTEM CONTACT ALL TESTS
MOLYKOTE 55
(P/N 4115127) WORK N DRÄGERSERVICE N PASS?
---------------------- PROPERLY?
ENSURE THAT
BAR OPERATES
PROPERLY

1. REINSTALL VAPORIZERS AND


CHECK FIT OF EXCLUSION BAR
REINSTALL IN VAPORIZER CAP, ESPECIALLY
VAPORIZERS ON THE RIGHT SIDE.
ON MACHINE PERFORM THE
FOLLOWING TESTS:
2. IF BINDING OCCURS, PULL BASE
OF VAPORIZER SLIGHTLY 1. FRESH GAS LEAK
FORWARD AND REPEAT THE
TEST. 2. VAPORIZER
ACCURACY
DOES N 3. IF EXCLUSION BAR
EXCL. SYSTEM ENGAGEMENT IMPROVES, SEE 3. EXCLUSION
WORK SECTION 7 FOR MACHINE S/Ns SYSTEM
PROPERLY? IN RANGE OF 10000 - 10187, OR
SECTION 5 FOR MACHINE S/Ns
10188 AND LATER.
Y

3-16 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

Guide 13: Can’t Remove Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Unit

CAUTION: If the piston unit handle can not be lifted to its full up position, DO NOT force
the handle up as this will damage the piston coupling assembly.

NOTE: For corrrect operation, the “U” shaped channel on the piston coupling assembly
(see Figure 3-4) should be in the up position when the piston-cylinder unit is
removed from the ventilator chassis, and should be in the down position when
the piston unit is properly installed in the ventilator chassis.

If the “U” shaped channel is inadvertently left in the up position when the
piston-cylinder unit is installed in an incorrect assembly sequence, the following
procedure will restore correct operation.

1. Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.


2. Turn the breathing system locking bar to its un-latched position, and
ensure that the piston unit handle is in its down position.
3. Look through the window in the metal plate behind the piston-cylinder unit
and observe the “U” shaped channel (see Figure 3-4). Using the red “T”
handled Divan tool or a screwdriver, move the “U” shaped channel back
approx. ½ in., and then push it to the right until it snaps out of view to its
down position.
NOTE: The piston-cylinder unit handle must always be in its down position before
latching the breathing system locking bar.

4. Turn the breathing system locking bar to its latched position.


5. Turn the System Power switch to ON, and allow the power-up sequence to
complete. When the Divan displays “Standby” mode, it should be possible to
remove and reinstall the piston-cylinder unit in the correct manner.

"U" SHAPED CHANNEL (UP POSITION)

"U" SHAPED CHANNEL (DOWN POSITION)

SV00020

FRONT VIEW
Piston Coupling Assembly - “U” Shaped Channel

Rev. E 3-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued) NM6000

Guide 14: Humming noise from Divan during mechanical ventilation

START

IF THE NOISE IS NOT EASILY REPRODUCIBLE,


USE THE SAME FRESH GAS FLOW, Pmax, Vt,
%IP, PEEP, AND RATE SETTINGS THAT WERE
SELECTED WHEN THE PROBLEM OCCURRED,
IN ORDER TO RECREATE THE SYMPTOM.

REPLACE
DOES NOISE NON-RETURN
ONLY OCCUR DURING Y
VALVE M32458 UNIT IS
MAN OR SPONT IN BREATHING
VENTILATION? FUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

DOES NOISE Y LUBRICATE ROD PERFORM DOES UNIT


OCCUR DURING ON PISTON-CYL UNIT COMPLETE DIVAN PASS DIVAN
INSPIRATORY (REFER TO SELF TEST SELF TEST?
PHASE? SECTION 7)

REPLACE N
N
NON-RETURN
VALVE M32458
IN BREATHING
SYSTEM N

REPLACE CONTACT
DOES NOISE DOES Y NON-RETURN DRÄGERSERVICE
N
OCCUR DURING HUMMING NOISE VALVE M32458
EXPIRATORY GO AWAY? IN BREATHING
PHASE? SYSTEM

SQUEEZE RESERVOIR
IS BAG TO APPROX HALF
RESERVOIR Y SIZE DURING EXP PHASE.
BAG FULLY
INFLATED? ALLOW SEVERAL
BREATHS TO TAKE
PLACE.

PRESS O2 FLUSH
TO FULLY INFLATE
RESERVOIR BAG.

ALLOW SEVERAL
BREATHS TO TAKE
PLACE.

3-18 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

4.0 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

This section outlines removal and replacement procedures for the field-replaceable
assemblies of the Narkomed 6000 anesthesia system.

These procedures are to be performed only by a Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified Technical
Service Representative (TSR).

The following are the only procedures authorized by Draeger Medical, Inc. to be performed
in the field. All other service procedures shall be referred to DrägerService.

NOTE:
The PMC Procedure given in Section 6 (and Section 6A if the machine is equipped
with an Integrated Patient Monitoring Module) must be performed after any
replacement, removal, calibration or adjustment procedure.

Tools and test equipment needed:


--Ball-end hex wrenches with long extension
--Screwdriver (slotted) with long extension
--6 mm hex wrench (for Divan piston-cylinder unit and breathing system)
--3 mm hex wrench (for Divan electronics assembly)
--Socket tool P/N 4115140 for VPO assembly

Rev. L 4-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.1 Cylinder Yoke Assemblies

Each cylinder yoke contains a replaceable filter and check valve assembly.
Replacement of this assembly requires that the yoke be removed from the
anesthesia machine. A typical cylinder yoke mounting and connection
arrangement is shown in Figure 4-1. Access to the yoke mounting screws and
tubing requires removal of covers from the machine.

4.1.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.1.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.1.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.1.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.1.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.1.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.1.7 Remove the cylinder where the yoke is to be replaced.

WARNING: Store the cylinder in a safe place and lay it on its side.

4.1.8 Remove the table lamp panel below the monitor.

4.1.9 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

4.1.10 Disconnect the gas line fitting at the yoke and remove the two yoke
mounting screws.

4.1.11 Remove the filter and check valve assembly from the yoke and install a
replacement assembly.

NOTE: If the entire yoke assembly is being replaced, verify that the pin
indexing arrangement and the label are in agreement with the gas
designation stamped on the mounting surface of the yoke. Refer to the
parts list in Section 8.

4.1.12 Position the yoke on the mounting rail, and install the two mounting
screws and lock washer. Tighten the screws securely. Connect the gas
line fitting to the yoke check valve.

4.1.13 If a new cylinder is being installed, remove the old sealing washer from
the gas inlet of the yoke and install a new washer.

4-2 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

YOKE MOUNTING SCREWS


AND LOCKWASHERS

GAS LINE

CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY


SV00148

YOKE (TYPICAL)

Figure 4-1. Cylinder Yoke Assembly

4.1.14 Install the correct cylinder in the yoke, making sure that the index pins
are properly engaged before tightening the handle bolt. The cylinder
should hang vertically after the handle is tight.

4.1.15 Perform the following leak test on the yoke assembly:

4.1.15.1 Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure indication on the
corresponding gauge at the front panel.

NOTE: The cylinder used for this test must contain the following
minimum pressure:
O2 : 1000 psi
N20: 700 psi
AIR: 1000 psi

4.1.15.2 Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the yoke.

Rev. K 4-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.1.15.3 For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes.

4.1.15.4 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise
direction. The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches
(5.25 inch diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to
the Vitalbus HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above
the power cord socket as shown in Figure 4-1A.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-1A. Power Cord Routing

4.1.16 Reinstall the rear panel.

4.1.17 Reinstall the cylinder in the yoke.

4.1.18 Reinstall the table lamp panel below the monitor.

4.1.19 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.1.20 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-4 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.2 Cylinder Pressure Regulators

Access to the cylinder pressure regulators and their tubing connections requires
that several panels be removed from the anesthesia machine. Each regulator is
supported on its copper tubing; a typical regulator arrangement is shown in
Figure 4-2.

4.2.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.2.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.2.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.2.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.2.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.2.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.2.7 Remove the cylinders for access to the regulator area.

4.2.8 Remove the table lamp panel below the monitor.

4.2.9 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

4.2.10 Disconnect the compression fittings at the regulator.

4.2.11 Record the serial number of the regulator that was removed, and
record the serial number of the replacement regulator.

NOTE: If fittings must be installed in the replacement regulator, use Loctite


#271 (red). Refer to the parts list in Section 8.

NOTE: For Canadian machines, verify that the correct relief valve is installed
in the regulator. Refer to the parts list in Section 8 for CSA items.

4.2.12 Position the replacement regulator, connect and tighten the


compression fittings.

4.2.13 Locate the test port in the regulator output line. Remove the plug from
the port and connect a test gauge.

4.2.14 Reinstall the cylinders and set the regulator output pressure in
accordance with the Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment given in
Section 5.

Rev. K 4-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00268

O2 REGULATOR

N2O REGULATOR

Figure 4-2. Cylinder Pressure Regulators

4.2.15 Perform the following leak test on the high pressure side of the
regulator:

4.2.15.1 Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure indication on the
corresponding gauge at the front panel.

NOTE: The cylinder used for this test must contain the following
minimum pressure:
O2 : 1000 psi
N20: 700 psi
AIR: 1000 psi

4.2.15.2 Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the yoke.

4-6 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.2.15.3 For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes.

4.2.15.4 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise
direction. The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches
(5.25 inch diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to
the Vitalbus HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above
the power cord socket as shown in Figure 4-2A.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-2A. Power Cord Routing

4.2.16 Reinstall the rear panel.

4.2.17 Reinstall the cylinder in the yoke.

4.2.18 Reinstall the table lamp panel below the monitor.

4.2.19 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.2.20 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. K 4-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.2A Cylinder Cutoff Valves (Canada)

Access to the cylinder cutoff valves requires removal of the back panel of the
machine below the cylinder yokes. The tubing arrangement is similar for O2,
N2O or Air, and is shown in Figure 4-2A.

4.2A.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.2A.2 Close all cylinder valves except one O2 valve.

4.2A.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.2A.4 Open the flow control valves to drain pressure from the system.

4.2A.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.2A.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.2A.7 Remove the cylinders for access to the regulator area.

4.2A.8 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

4.2A.9 Disconnect the flexible tubing from the cutoff valve assembly at the
point marked A on the illustration detail.

4.2A.10 Disconnect the compression fittings at points marked C on the


illustration detail.

4.2A.11 Remove the cutoff valve assembly.

4.2A.12 Install the replacement cutoff valve assembly and tighten the
compression fittings.

4.2A.13 Connect the flexible tubing to the replacement assembly and secure it
with the press-on hose clamp.

4.2A.14 Perform the following test:

NOTE: The cylinders used for this test must contain the following minimum
pressure: O2: 1000 psi; N2O: 745 psi; Air: 1000 psi.

-- Install the cylinders in the yokes.


-- For the O2 cutoff valve: opoen the O2 cylinder valve and set the
oxygen flow to 4 L/min.
-- For the N2O or Air cutoff valve: open the O2 cylinder valve and the
N2O or Air cylinder valve. Set each flow to 4 L/min.

4-7A Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00434

Figure 4-2A. Cylinder Cutoff Valve Piping Arrangement

Rev. H 4-7B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

-- Connect the pipeline hoses.


-- Turn off the pipeline supply and observe the pipeline pressure
gauge(s). The 4 L/min. flow(s) shall be maintained when the pipeline
pressure drops through the range of 45 to 40 psi.
-- Close the cylinder valves and close the flow control valves.
-- Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.2A.15 Remove the cylinders and reinstall the back panel on the machine.

4.2A.16 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-7C Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

This page intentionally left blank

Rev. H 4-7D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.3 Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges

Replacement of the cylinder and pipeline pressure gauges requires that the
flowmeter shield and the rear flowmeter housing cover be removed from the
anesthesia machine. Gauge connection and mounting details are shown in
Figure 4-3.

4.3.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.3.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.3.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.3.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.3.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.3.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.3.7 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.3.8 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.3.9 Remove the oxygen flow control knob. The knob has two setscrews

NOTE: If the knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew, carefully note
its position so that it can be re-assembled in the same position with the
“Off Stop” properly set.

4.3.10 Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.

4.3.11 Carefully remove the plexiglass flowmeter shield.

4.3.12 At the back of the gauge, disconnect the compression fitting (cylinder
gauges) or flexible tubing (pipeline gauges).

4.3.13 Remove the gauge mounting nuts, and remove the gauge from the front
of the panel.

4.3.14 Install the replacement gauge in the panel using the mounting nuts
that were removed in the previous step.

4-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00197

FLOWMETER
SHIELD

KNOB
GUARD KEP NUTS
(2X EACH
GAUGE)

KNOB
GUARD
SCREWS PIPELINE PRESSURE
GAUGE (TYPICAL)
O2 KNOB
CYLINDER PRESSURE
GAUGE (TYPICAL)

Figure 4-3. Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges

4-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.3.15 For pipeline gauges, install a new length of flexible tubing. Secure each
end with a press-on hose clamp and install an appropriate label on
each end of the tube.

For cylinder gauges, reconnect the compression fitting and perform the
following leak test:

4.3.15.1 Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure indication on the
corresponding gauge at the front panel.

NOTE: The cylinder used for this test must contain the following
minimum pressure:

O2 : 1000 psi
N20: 700 psi
AIR: 1000 psi

4.3.15.2 Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the yoke.

4.3.15.3 For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes.

4.3.16 Reinstall the cylinder in the yoke.

4.3.17 Reinstall the plexiglass flowmeter shield.

4.3.18 Place the knob guard over the flow control valves (ensure that the large
clearance hole is over the oxygen flow control valve) and install its two
retaining screws.

4.3.19 Install the oxygen flow control knob and tighten its setscrews. If the
knobs are installed properly, their labels will be straight when the
knobs are against their clockwise stops.

4.3.20 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.

4.3.21 Reinstall the flowmeter housing rear cover.

4.3.22 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.3.23 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-10 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.4 Flowmeters

The flowmeter tubes are held by compression in gaskets at the top and bottom
of each tube. Each upper gasket is seated in an adjustable retainer that allows
removal of the tube as shown in Figure 4-4. Access to the flow tubes and their
retainers requires removal of the plexiglass flowmeter shield.

4.4.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.4.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.4.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.4.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.4.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.4.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.4.7 Remove the oxygen flow control knob. The knob has two setscrews

NOTE: If the knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew, carefully note
its position so that it can be re-assembled in the same position with the
“Off Stop” properly set.

4.4.8 Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.

4.4.9 Carefully remove the plexiglass flowmeter shield.

4.4.10 Loosen the retainer screw directly above the flowmeter tube to be
replaced. Turning the screw counter-clockwise will raise the upper flow
tube retainer. Raise the retainer far enough to be able to pull the top of
the tube outward, and remove the tube.

NOTE: It will be easier to hold the tube if the adjacent lighting channel is pulled
forward and temporarily removed.

NOTE: If the bottom of the tube is seated in a flow restrictor, be sure that the
arrangement of the restrictor and its gaskets is not disturbed.

4.4.11 Make sure that the replacement flow tube bears the correct markings
and has a ball.

4-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00199

FLOWMETER
LIGHT CHANNEL

FLOWMETER
LIGHT STRIP

FLOW TUBE

GASKET W/GUIDE RING


(2X PER FLOW TUBE)

RESTRICTOR

RESTRICTOR HOUSING

O-RING

Figure 4-4. Flowmeters

4-12
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.4.12 Place the bottom of the flow tube into the guide ring of the lower
gasket, and position the top of the flow tube into the center guide ring
of the top gasket.

CAUTION: the flowmeter tube must be properly centered over the guide rings
or damage to the flowmeter tube may occur.

4.4.13 Ensure that the markings on the flow tube are facing forward, and
turn the upper retainer screw clockwise until the flow tube is firmly
held in place.

CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the screw as the flowmeter tube may break.

4.4.14 Perform the following leak test on the system:

4.4.14.1 Disconnect the fresh gas hose from the breathing system; ensure
that all flow control valves are closed.

4.4.14.2 Connect a test gauge and B.P. bulb to the fresh gas hose, and
pressurize the system to 50 cm H2O.

4.4.14.3 The pressure should not drop more than 10 cm H2O in thirty
seconds.

4.4.15 Disconnect the test gauge and Reconnect the fresh gas hose to the
breathing system.

4.4.16 Replace any lighting channels that were previously removed.

4.4.17 Reinstall the plexiglass flowmeter shield.

4.4.18 Place the knob guard over the flow control valves (ensure that the large
clearance hole is over the oxygen flow control valve) and install its two
retaining screws.

4.4.19 Install the oxygen flow control valve and tighten its setscrews. If the
knobs are installed properly, their labels will be straight when the
knobs are against their clockwise stops.

4.4.20 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.4.21 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.5 Flow Control Valves

The flow control valves have replaceable elements that are removable from the
front of the gas instrumentation panel as shown in Figure 4-5. Each flow
control knob has a clockwise positive stop arrangement that prevents damage to
the valve seat. Whenever a valve cartridge is replaced, its "off stop" must be set
as outlined in the following procedure.

4.5.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.5.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.5.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.

4.5.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.5.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the O2
Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.5.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.5.7 Remove the oxygen flow control knob.

4.5.8 Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.

4.5.9 Remove the knob (if not already removed) from the valve that is being
replaced, and remove the stop pin nut.

4.5.10 Remove the flow control valve by holding it at the wrench flats and
turning it counter-clockwise.

4.5.11 Install the replacement flow control valve in the valve body.

CAUTION: Before tightening the cartridge, rotate the valve shaft several turns
counter-clockwise to prevent bottoming the valve element into the seat
when the cartridge is tightened.

4.5.12 Reinstall the stop pin nut.

4.5.13 Place the knob guard over the flow control valves (ensure that the large
clearance hole is over the oxygen flow control valve) and install its two
retaining screws.

4-14
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00198

FLOW CONTROL
VALVE

WRENCH
FLATS

LABEL STOP PIN NUT

KNOB KNOB GUARD

Figure 4-5. Flow Control Valves

4-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.5.14 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.5.15 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.5.16 For the oxygen flow control valve:

Turn the flow control valve clockwise until the flow rate will not drop
any further.

4.5.17 For the other gas flow control valves:

Set the oxygen flow rate to 4 L/min.

Turn the other gas flow control valve clockwise until the flow rate is
zero.

4.5.18 Place the knob on the flow control valve shaft and turn it clockwise
until it engages the stop pin. Tighten one of the knob setscrews.

4.5.19 Turn the knob in both directions and ensure that the flow can be
controlled over its entire range. When the valve is closed, the knob
should be against its clockwise stop. Tighten the remaining setscrew.

4.5.20 If the knob label is not horizontal when the valve is closed, remove the
label and install a new label in the correct position.

4.5.21 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-16
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.6 Minimum O2 Flow Cutoff Solenoid

The minimum O2 flow cutoff solenoid is located on the back of the O2 block in
the flowmeter housing. The mounting and connection arrangement is shown in
Figure 4-6.

4.6.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.

4.6.2 Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.6.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.6.4 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.6.5 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.6.6 Disconnect the wire harness from the solenoid terminals.

4.6.7 Note the tubing connection arrangement, and disconnect the flexible
tubing from the hose barbs on the solenoid.

4.6.8 Remove the screws securing the mounting bracket to the O2 block, and
remove the assembly from the machine.

4.6.9 If the replacement is not supplied with a bracket, transfer the existing
bracket to the replacement solenoid.

4.6.10 Install the replacement bracket and solenoid assembly to the O2 block
with the hardware that was previously removed.

4.6.11 Reconnect the flexible tubing and secure each connection with a press-
on hose clamp.

4.6.12 Reconnect the wire harness to the solenoid terminals.

4.6.13 Reconnect the pipeline supplies and perform the following test:

4.6.13.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.6.13.2 Observe the O2 flowmeter during the ventilator self test period.

The O2 flow should drop to zero during a portion of the self test.

4-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00270

BRACKET
MOUNTING
SCREWS

MINIMUM O2 FLOW
O2 BLOCK CUTOFF SOLENOID

Figure 4-6. Minimum O2 Flow Cutoff Solenoid

4-18
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.6.14 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.6.15 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.

4.6.16 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.6.17 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.6.18 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.7 Auxiliary Oxygen Flow Meter

The auxiliary oxygen flowmeter is attached to the inside of the front panel by
two Z-brackets. Access to the attaching hardware and tubing connections
requires removal of the flowmeter housing back cover, and removal of the
bottom plate below the system power switch as shown in Figure 4-7.

4.7.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.

4.7.2 Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.7.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.

4.7.4 Pull the circuit breaker knobs to their ‘out’ position.

4.7.5 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.7.6 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.7.7 Remove the bottom plate below the system power switch, and
disconnect the flexible tube attached to the back of the auxiliary O2
outlet.

4.7.8 Remove the Auxiliary O2 flowmeter knob.

4.7.9 Loosen (do not remove!) the mounting screw holding the upper Z-
bracket approximately ½ turn by reaching through the flowmeter
housing with a ball-end hex wrench on a long extension.

4.7.10 From the bottom, loosen the lower mounting screw until the lower Z-
bracket can be moved away from the flowmeter, then pull the
flowmeter toward the bottom of the panel.

4.7.11 Disconnect the flexible O2 supply tubing from the hose barb on the
flowmeter, and remove the flowmeter.

4.7.12 If applicable, transfer the output tubing to the upper hose barb on the
replacement flowmeter.

4.7.13 Position the replacement flowmeter behind the panel; attach the O2
supply tube to the lower hose barb and secure it with a press-on hose
clamp.

4.7.14 Slide the flowmeter up into the upper Z-bracket. Move the lower Z-
bracket into the correct position, and tighten the mounting screws.

4-20
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

BRACKET SCREW (TYP)

UPPER Z-BRACKET

AUX O2 FLOWMETER

O2 SUPPLY TUBING
CONNECTION

LOWER Z-BRACKET
VIEW THROUGH
BACK OF FLOWMETER
HOUSING
FLOWMETER
OUTPUT TUBE

SV00280

FLOWMETER OUTPUT TUBE

AUX O2 OUTLET & BULKHEAD ASSEMBLY


BOTTOM
PLATE SCREWS BOTTOM PLATE

Figure 4-7. Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter

4-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.7.15 Reconnect the output tube to the auxiliary O2 outlet on the bottom
plate, and reinstall the bottom plate.

4.7.16 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.Reinstall the auxiliary
O2 flowmeter knob.

4.7.17 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.7.18 Connect the pipeline hoses and restore AC power to the machine.

4.7.19 Restore all circuit breakers to their ‘in’ position.

4.7.20 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-22
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.8 Oxygen Supply Pressure Failure Protection Device

The air and nitrous oxide supplies within the machine are monitored by oxygen
supply failure protection devices (OFPDs) which prevent the flow of these gases
if there is insufficient oxygen pressure available. Access to these devices
requires removal of the flowmeter housing back cover. Mounting and connection
details are shown in Figure 4-8.

4.8.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.8.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.8.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.

4.8.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.8.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the O2
Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.8.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.8.7 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.8.8 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.8.9 Disconnect the copper tube at the back of the OFPD.

4.8.10 Disconnect the flexible tubing from the hose barb at the top of the
OFPD.

4.8.11 Remove the three screws securing the OFPD to the flowmeter sub-
assembly, and remove the OFPD.

NOTE: The N2O OFPD has longer screws, which pass through the oxygen ratio
controller (ORC) and into the flowmeter sub-assembly. These screws
retain both devices.

4.8.12 Ensure that the O-rings are correctly in place, and install the
replacement OFPD with the hardware that was previously removed.

4.8.13 Reconnect the small diameter tubing to the hose barb on the OFPD and
secure the connection with a press-on hose clamp.

4-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00155

ORC

N2O OFPD

AIR OFPD

Figure 4-8. OFPD Replacement

4-24
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.8.14 Reconnect the copper tube to the OFPD.

4.8.15 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.

4.8.16 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.8.17 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.8.18 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.9 Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch

The oxygen supply low pressure alarm switch is located on the back of the O 2
block in the flowmeter housing. Access to the switch requires removal of the
flowmeter housing back cover. Tubing and electrical connections are shown in
Figure 4-9.

4.9.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.

4.9.2 Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.9.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Disconnect AC power


from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to their ‘out’ position.

4.9.4 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.9.5 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.9.6 Disconnect the wire harness from the switch terminals.

4.9.7 Disconnect the wire harness from the minimum flow cutoff solenoid.

4.9.8 Disconnect the copper O2 supply tube at the back T-fitting behind the
O2 block on the flowmeter sub-assembly.

4.9.9 Disconnect the ventilator O2 supply flexible tube from the bottom port
on the T-fitting.

4.9.10 Disconnect the flexible tubes from the hose barbs on the OFPDs and
the ORC.

4.9.11 Remove the three screws securing the O2 block to the flowmeter sub-
assembly, and remove the block with the T-fittings and O2 supply
pressure switch attached.

4.9.12 Remove the O2 supply pressure switch from the front T-fitting.
Carefully remove any sealing tape remnants from the threads in the T-
fitting.

4.9.13 Install the replacement O2 supply pressure switch with new sealing
tape, making sure that the switch is oriented like the original.

4.9.14 Ensure that the O-ring is installed correctly, and reinstall the O2 block
assembly.

4-26 Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00156

WIRE
HARNESS

O2 SUPPLY
PRESSURE
SWITCH

WIRE HARNESS
O2 BLOCK (MIN. FLOW
SOLENOID)

O2 SUPPLY
TUBE
BLOCKMOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)

Figure 4-9. Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch

4-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.9.15 Reconnect the flexible tubes to the ORC and to each OFPD. Secure
each connection with a press-on hose clamp.

4.9.16 Reconnect the copper O2 supply tube at the T-fitting.

4.9.17 Reconnect switch wire harness, and the solenoid wire harness.

4.9.18 Locate the O2 pressure test port. Remove the plug from the port and
connect a test gauge.

4.9.19 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.9.20 Open an oxygen cylinder valve and turn the System Power switch to
ON.

4.9.21 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min./

4.9.22 Close the oxygen cylinder valve.

4.9.23 As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when the
pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown in the test gauge.

4.9.24 If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi or above 40
psi, turn the adjustment wheel (see illustration), repeat the test and
adjust as necessary to bring the set point into the correct range.

4.9.25 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.9.26 Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the test port.

4.9.27 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.

4.9.28 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.9.29 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

4.9.30 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-28 Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.10 Oxygen Ratio Controller

The oxygen ratio controller (ORC) is attached to the N2O flowmeter sub-
assembly. Access to the ORC requires removal of the flowmeter housing back
cover, and removal of the N2O OFPD assembly. The ORC mounting and
connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4-10.

4.10.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.10.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.10.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.

4.10.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.10.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the O2
Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.10.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.10.7 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.10.8 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

4.10.9 Disconnect the copper tube at the back of the N2O OFPD.

4.10.10 Disconnect the flexible tubing from the hose barb at the top of the
OFPD.

4.10.11 Disconnect the flexible tubing from the hose barb at the top of the
ORC.

NOTE: The N2O OFPD has long mounting screws, which pass through the
oxygen ratio controller (ORC) and into the flowmeter sub-assembly.
These screws retain both devices.

4.10.12 Remove the three screws securing the OFPD and the ORC to the
flowmeter sub-assembly. Remove the OFPD and the ORC.

4.10.13 Position the replacement ORC at the back of the N2O flowmeter sub-
assembly; be sure that its O-rings are in place. Reinstall the OFPD,
with the mounting screws going through the ORC and into the
flowmeter sub-assembly. Tighten the screws.

4-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00157

ORC

N2O OFPD

Figure 4-10. Oxygen Ratio Controller

4-30
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.10.14 Reconnect the flexible tubing to the ORC and the OFPD. Secure each
connection with a press-on hose clamp.

4.10.15 Reconnect the copper tube to the N2O OFPD.

4.10.16 Reconnect the pipeline supplies.

4.10.17 Perform the ORC adjustment procedure given in Section 5 of this


manual.

4.10.18 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original
position, and tighten its captive mounting screw.

4.10.19 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.10.20 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.11 O2 Flush Valve

The O2 Flush valve is located at the left side of the front bumper in a housing
joined to the bag pole. The rear cover of the housing is removable for access to
the valve. The mounting and tubing arrangement for the valve is shown in
Figure 4-11.

4.11.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.11.2 Disconnect all pipeline hoses.

4.11.3 Close the O2 cylinder valve.

4.11.4 Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

4.11.5 Remove the rear cover from the O2 Flush valve housing.

4.11.6 Remove the O2 Flush button. Its set screws are accessible through
holes in the guard ring.

4.11.7 Insert a rod or hex wrench through the holes in the guard ring (or use a
spanner wrench), and un-screw the guard ring from the threaded neck
of the valve while holding the valve from the back with an open end
wrench.

4.11.8 Pull the valve from the back of the housing and disconnect the flexible
tubing.

4.11.9 Using Loctite as specified in the illustration, assemble the fittings into
the replacement valve.

4.11.10 Connect the tube with two O2 labels to the lower valve fitting, and the
tube with the single O2 label to the upper valve fitting. Then position
the valve in the housing.

4.11.11 Using Loctite, secure the valve in the housing with the guard ring.
Reinstall the flat washer, then secure the O2 Flush button. Make sure
both set screws are tight.

4.11.12 Reinstall the rear cover on the O2 Flush valve housing.

4.11.13 Disconnect the breathing system hose from the fresh gas outlet and
perform the following test:

4.11.13.1 Open the oxygen cylinder valve.

4.11.13.2 Connect a test volumeter to the fresh gas outlet, and reset the
volumeter to zero.

4-32 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.11.13.3 Press the O2 Flush button and observe the flow rate. It should be
between 45 and 65 L/min.

O2

O2
O2

Figure 4-11. O2 Flush Valve Assembly

Rev. K 4-33 Rev. K


RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.11.13.4 Disconnect the volumeter from the fresh gas outlet.

4.11.14 Reconnect the breathing system hose to the fresh gas outlet.

4.11.15 Connect the pipeline hoses.

4.11.16 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6.

4-34
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.12 Ventilator Piston-Cylinder Diaphragm Replacement

The piston-cylinder unit is part of the Divan ventilator and is located directly
below the hinged top of the ventilator chassis. The unit contains two roller
diaphragm seals. The following instructions include a replacement procedure
for the front (patient side) and rear diaphragm seals. The mechanical
arrangement of the piston-cylinder unit is shown in Figure 4-12.

4.12.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY (or switch the ventilator
to Standby Mode).

4.12.2 Open the hinged top of the ventilator.

4.12.3 Turn the breathing system locking bar (¼ turn CCW) to unlock the
release lever on the piston-cylinder unit. (This will also move the
breathing system away from the patient gas port on the piston-cylinder
unit to prevent damage to the lip seal when the piston-cylinder unit is
removed.)

4.12.4 Pull the release lever on the piston-cylinder unit up, and using the
lever as a handle, pull the piston-cylinder unit straight up and out of
the ventilator.

NOTE: If the piston-cylinder unit can not be easily removed from the ventilator,
contact DrägerService. The removal position of the drive unit may need
to be re-adjusted.

4.12.5 Loosen the ¼ turn 6 mm quick-lock screws and remove the cylinder
head from the unit.

4.12.6 Hold the piston, and loosen the 6 mm center screw securing the piston
to the piston rod.

4.12.7 Remove the piston and the front diaphragm.

NOTE: Skip the next ten steps if you are replacing only the front diaphragm.

4.12.8 Remove the center nut (14 mm box or open end wrench) and spring
washer securing the separator to the piston rod. Place an allen wrench
through the hole in the piston rod to keep the rod from turning while
unscrewing the nut.

4.12.9 Remove the two screw-nuts from the back plate using a forked, slotted
driver tool P/N 7900864.

Rev. J 4-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

PISTON FRONT SPACER RODS (2X)


(FRONT HALF)

CENTER SCREW MID-PIECE

QUICK-LOCK PISTON ROD


SCREWS )2X) MOLD MARK

SCREW
CYLINDER NUTS (2X)
HEAD

RED
DOT

BACK
FRONT DIAPHRAGM PLATE
(SHOWN FOLDED BACK) PISTON
CENTER NUT (REAR HALF)

SPRING WASHER REAR DIAPHRAGM

5MM SOCKET
SEPARATOR
HEAD SCREWS (2X)

SV00275

DETAIL OF ASSEMBLED DIAPHRAGM:

DIAPHRAGM
(FRONT HALF)

PISTON
LOCKING
(FRONT HALF)
BAR

Figure 4-12. Piston-cylinder unit diaphragm replacement

4-36
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.12.10 Orient the piston-cylinder unit so that the red dot on the mid-piece is
facing up. Using a pencil, draw an arrow next to the red dot pointing
toward the front of the piston-cylinder unit. This will help you to
correctly orient the mid-piece when the unit is re-assembled.

4.12.11 Remove the two 5 mm socket head screws from the front of the mid-
piece.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the diaphragm with the allen wrench in
the next step.

4.12.12 Unscrew the two front spacer rods from the mid-piece and withdraw
them from the piston-cylinder unit. (These rods also pass through the
rear spacers.) Place an allen wrench through the hole in each rod in
order to turn it.

4.12.13 Remove the mid-piece and set it aside.

4.12.14 Un-screw the separator from the piston rod by turning the piston.
Place an allen wrench through the hole in the piston rod to keep the
rod from turning while unscrewing the separator.

The rear diaphragm can now be removed from the rear half of the
piston.

4.12.15 Fit the replacement diaphragm over the rear piston half (with the mold
mark toward the piston). Screw the separator onto the piston rod and
tightly against the diaphragm, and reinstall the spring washer and
center nut. Place an allen wrench through the hole in the piston rod to
keep the rod from turning while tightening the nut.

Carefully fit the diaphragm to the edge of the cylinder around its
circumference.

4.12.16 Orient the mid-piece correctly (red dot on top, arrow pointing forward)
and place it carefully against the diaphragm. Make sure the
diaphragm fits properly around its circumference.

Reinstall the 5 mm socket head screws (do not tighten them) to hold
the mid-piece in place.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage the diaphragm in the next step.

4.12.17 Reinstall the front spacer rods, making sure that they go through the
rear spacers, and that the rear spacers are seated properly. Tighten the
front spacer rods securely.

4.12.18 Tighten the 5 mm socket head screws, and reinstall the two screw-nuts
on the back plate.

4-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.12.19 Install the replacement front diaphragm with its mold mark facing the
front of the piston-cylinder unit as shown in the illustration. Assemble
the diaphragm and piston in the same manner as the original, and
reattach the piston to the piston rod by tightening the center 6 mm
screw. Bring the diaphragm forward over the piston.

NOTE: the diaphragm must form a neat U-fold as shown in the illustration
detail when the cylinder head is replaced in the next step.

4.12.20 As you reinstall the cylinder head, carefully fit the diaphragm to the
edge of the cylinder around its circumference, and secure the cylinder
head with the ¼ turn quick-lock screws. Ensure that the cylinder head
is oriented correctly (the red dot should be on top) with its breathing
system port on the left as you face the front of the piston-cylinder unit.

4.12.21 Reinstall the piston-cylinder unit: holding it by the release lever -


lower it into the ventilator chassis until it is properly seated and the
piston rod is correctly engaged in the drive unit.

4.12.22 Fold down the release lever and turn the breathing system locking bar
(¼ turn CW) to lock the piston-cylinder unit in place.

4.12.23 Start the ventilator in Service Mode by holding down the two hidden
keys on the ventilator control panel (see Section 2, Diagnostics) and
turning the System Power switch to ON.

4.12.24 Turn the knob on the ventilator control panel to display MOVE
PISTON, and press the knob.

4.12.25 Turn the knob to move the piston over its full stroke: verify that the
piston and diaphragm seals are moving correctly.

4.12.26 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.12.27 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-38
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.13 Divan Ventilator PCB Assemblies, Battery and EPROM Replacement

Replacement procedures are divided into the following sub-sections:


4.13.1 3.6 V lithium battery P/N 1817582 replacement on CPU 1
4.13.2 CPU 1 P/N 8200994, 8305141 replacement
4.13.3 CPU 2 P/N 8305664, 8200990 replacement
4.13.4 ADDA P/N 8200974, 8200970 replacement
4.13.5 Divan Software Upgrade Kit 7.40 P/N 4117024, E-PROM P/N 4116983-001 on
CPU 1 and E-PROM P/N 4116983-002 on CPU 2
4.13.6 9.0 V nicad battery P/N 8301856 replacement on motherboard
Access to the ventilator electronics assembly is needed for PCB replacement, E-
PROM updates, and periodic battery replacement. The 9 V battery on the
motherboard is replaced every three years. The 3.6 V lithium battery on CPU 1 as
identified by a label on the PCB header connection P/N 8305141 is replaced each year
or sooner as indicated on the battery “Replace By:” label, or every 6 years if PCB is
identified as P/N 8604032.

4.13.1 3.6v Lithium Battery P/N 1817582 Replacement on CPU 1

NOTE: The 3.6v lithium battery is electrically connected to CPU1 via a blue
two-pin shunt or solder bridge on the small vertically mounted PCB located
near the battery. When the battery is electrically connected to CPU1 it has a
one-year service life from the date of installation. A new process is being
implemented that will place an identifying label on the battery to indicate the
battery’s required replacement by date.

CAUTION: Replacement of the lithium battery on CPU1 requires de-soldering


and re-soldering at the PCB level. Only service personnel with advanced
soldering capabilities shall attempt to perform this procedure.

4.13.1.1 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.1.2 Disconnect the AC power from the machine and pull all circuit
breakers to their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.1.3 Raise the Divan tabletop cover to its open position.

4.13.1.4 Remove the cover plate at the right side of the Divan assembly.

4.13.1.5 Identify the extreme right location of CPU1 PCB and its battery.
Refer to Figure 4-13.

NOTE: CPU1 PCB is identified as CPU - STANDARD 2

Rev. L 4-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00051 COVER PLATE

BOARD
RETAINER

LITHIUM
BATTERY

CPU - STANDARD 2
U U

RIBBON U

CABLE

CPU 1 BOARD
(COMPONENT SIDE)

TOP VIEW OF DIVAN


PCB COMPARTMENT WITH
CPU2 ADDA CPU1 COVER PLATE REMOVED

Figure 4-13. Location of PCB Assemblies and 3.6 V Lithium Battery

4-40 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.13.1.6 If the battery replace by label date indicates less than 3-months
from the current date, the battery must be replaced. Skip to step
4.13.1.9.

If the battery does not contain a replace by label on the battery, then the required
replacement interval must be established. Remove the PCB board retainer. Carefully
unplug CPU1 from the motherboard by raising it straight up and out of its retainer.
Compare the alphanumeric serial number printed on the PCB’s header connector.
Refer to the serial number chart on attachment 1. If CPU1 indicates that its date of
manufacture is greater than 9 months from the current date, the battery must be
replaced, (after recording the Divan’s Operating Hours, Total Hours and Error Code
information). Skip to step 4.13.1.7.

If the battery’s ‘replace by’ label date indicates 3 months or greater from the current
date, the battery is not due for replacement. Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB
boards. Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers. Inspection
is complete.

4.13.1.7 Reinstall CPU1 PCB into the extreme right location making sure
it’s fully seated into the motherboard and install the PCB board
retainer on the top of the circuit boards.

4.13.1.8 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.1.9 Start the Divan in Service Mode by pressing the left pad of the
STANDBY button and the pad above it, while turning the System
power switch to ON. Rotate the knob to display LOGBOOK and
press the knob. Review the last ten logbook entries, then press the
knob to exit the function.

4.13.1.10 Rotate the knob to select TOTAL HOURS. Press the knob and
record the hours shown on the 7-segment display for Vt and rate
for future reference. Press the knob to exit the function. Turn the
knob to display OPERATING HOURS. Press the knob and record
the hours shown on the 7-segment display for Vt and rate for
further reference. Press the knob to exit the function.

4.13.1.11 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Disconnect AC


power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to their ‘out’
position.

4.13.1.12 Remove the PCB board retainer.

4.13.1.13 Carefully unplug the CPU1 from the motherboard by raising it


straight up and out of its retainer.

4.13.1.14 Locate the small vertically mounted PCB near the battery (see
detail in Figure 4-13B).

Rev. L 4-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.13.1.15 Determine if the PCB contains a removable jumper or a solder


bridge. If it has a jumper, remove and discard it. If it has a solder
bridge, open the solder bridge.
CAUTION: Use only soldering iron with a grounded tip.
4.13.1.16 Before unsoldering the battery, note its orientation and polarity on
the CPU1 board. Carefully install the replacement battery in the
same manner.

4.13.1.17 On CPU1 close the solder bridge on the small vertically mounted
PCB located near the battery.

4.13.1.18 Record the current month plus one year from the current year on
the battery Replace By: label p/n 4116949 and affix this label to
the side wall of the battery on the side opposite to the PCB’s
header connector.

4.13.1.19 Reinstall CPU1 PCB into the extreme right location making sure
it’s fully seated into the motherboard and install the board
retainer on the top of the circuit boards.

4.13.1.20 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.1.21 Start the Divan on Service Mode by pressing and holding the left
pad of the Standby button and the pad above it while turning the
System Power switch to ON. Press the rotary knob then rotate it
two selections to the right to display select lang.
(Sprachauswahl). Verify and or make the following adjustments.

Note: Faults Nr. 7, 9, 12, or 21 (Stöung Nr. 7, 9, 12, 21) may be encountered and
are normal immediately upon power-up after CPU1 battery replacement or
CPU1 battery jumper installation.

Select Language: Press the rotary dial, select US. Version 07.xx. Press the
rotary knob to exit the function.

Removal Position: Turn the rotary knob to display removal pos., then press
the knob to confirm. The screen will display Adjust Piston, then starting with
the left side of the bar graph half lit, turn the rotary knob to move the
illuminated bar graph one segment to the left. Unlatch the Breasy and attempt
to remove, then install the piston cylinder. Repeat this process until the piston
begins to be difficult to remove, then note this location on the bar graph display.
Now starting with the left side of the bar graph half lit, turn the rotary knob to
move the illuminated bar graph one segment to the right and attempt to remove
then install the piston cylinder. Repeat this process until the piston begins to be
difficult to remove, then note this location on the bar graph display. Determine
the algebraic mean of the two extreme reference points, then turn the rotary
knob until the bar graph LED indicates this value. Confirm the piston cylinder
unit can be easily removed and installed. Close the latch on the Breasy. Press
the rotary knob to exit the function.

4-42 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

Select System: Turn the rotary knob to display Select System, then press the
knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary knob to select Cicero EM, then press
the knob to confirm. Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Total Hours: Using a non-conductive tool, set the third DIP switch on the
ADDA PCB to the down position. Turn the rotary knob to display Total Hours,
then press the knob to confirm selection. Reenter the total hours information as
follows:

Rate key increments the 10,000 digit (range 0-2)


I:E key increments the 1,000 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
% I.P./Flow increments the 100 digit (range 0-9)
PEEP increments the 10 digit (range 0-9)
SIMV Rate increments 1 digit (range 0-9)

Note: If the value is zero the LED segment remains blank. If the 10,000 digit is
set to 2 then the 1,000 and 100 digits can only be altered in the range of 0-5.

Press the Pmax key to enter the displayed value to memory.

Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Operating Hours: Turn the rotary knob to display Operating Hours, then
press the knob to confirm selection. Press the Pmax key to allow information to
be changed as follows:

Rate key increments the 10,000 digit (range 0-2)


I:E key increments the 1,000 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
% I.P./Flow increments the 100 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
PEEP increments the 10 digit (range 0-9)
SIMV Rate increments 1 digit (range 0-9)

Note: If the value is zero the LED segment remains blank. If the 10,000 digit is
set to 2 then the 1,000 and 100 digits can only be altered in the range of 0-5.

Press the Pmax key to enter the displayed value to memory.

Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Select Parameter: Turn the rotary knob to display Select Parameter, then
press the knob to confirm selection. The display will then indicate Default
Settings. Refer to the chart listed below and touch each key to display the
current default value. If a parameter requires adjustment, rotate the knob to
make to the correct setting.

Rev. K 4-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Parameter Setting
Pmax 25 @ Software Version 7.13
Pmax 30 @ Software Version 7.40
I:E 1.0 : 2.0
Press the rotary knob twice to exit the function.

Display Config: Rotate the knob to show display config., then press the knob
to confirm selection. Scroll the knob to display, Display ON then press the knob
to exit the function.

Confirm Mode: Turn the rotary knob to display Confirm Mode, then press
the knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary knob to select Confirm R-Knob,
then press the knob to exit the function.

Cancel Test: (Applies only to 7.40 Divan Software) Turn the rotary knob to
display Cancel Test, then press the knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary
knob to select Limited, then press the knob to confirm. Press the rotary knob to
exit the function.

4.13.1.22 Turn the knob to select log book, then press the knob.

4.13.1.23 Press the Pmax key to reset the display to [0000] 000 00H.

4.13.1.24 Using a non-conductive tool, return the 3rd DIP switch to its
original (up) position.

4.13.1.25 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.1.26 Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB boards, (at the completion
of the PMC).

4.13.1.27 Turn the System Power switch to Standby, then to ON and verify
that the ventilator successfully completes its self-test routine.

4.13.1.28 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4.13.1.29 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6 of the Narkomed


6000 Technical Service Manual.

4-43A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.13.2 CPU1, (CPU Standard 2) p/n 8200994, 8305141, 8604038


Replacement

NOTE: The 3.6v lithium battery is electrically connected to CPU1 via a blue two-pin
shunt or solder bridge on the small vertically mounted PCB located near the battery.
When the battery is electrically connected to CPU1 (P/N 8200994 or 8305141) it has a
one-year service life from the date of installation. Part No. 8604038 has a six year
service life from date of installation. The identifying part number is printed on a label
on the header connector of CPU1. A new process is being implemented that will place an
identifying label on the battery to indicate the battery’s ‘replace by’ date. If the battery’s
replace by date has not been previously defined, the battery must be replaced if the
alphanumeric serial number printed on a label on the header connector of CPU1
indicates that it is greater then 9 months old. Refer to the serial number reference chart
(Figure 4-13A) and also to Section 4.13.1 if the battery requires replacement.

CAUTION: Replacement of CPU1 requires soldering at the PCB level. Only service
personnel with advanced soldering capabilities shall attempt to perform this procedure.

CAUTION: the firmware E-PROMs used in the Divan ventilator are installed as a set of
components on CPU1 daughter PCB and CPU2 PCB. As such the software versions
must be identical.

4.13.2.1 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY. Start the Divan in Service
Mode by pressing the left pad of the STANDBY button and the pad above
it, while turning the System power switch to ON. Rotate the knob to
display LOGBOOK and press the knob. Review the last ten logbook
entries, then press the knob to exit the function.

4.13.2.2 Rotate the knob to select TOTAL HOURS. Press the knob and record the
hours shown on the 7-segment display for Vt and rate for future
reference. Press the knob to exit the function. Turn the knob to display
OPERATING HOURS. Press the knob and record the hours shown on
the 7-segment display for Vt and rate for further reference. Press the
knob to exit the function.

4.13.2.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.2.4 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.2.5 Raise the Divan tabletop cover to its open position.

4.13.2.6 Remove the cover plate at the right side of the Divan assembly.

4.13.2.7 Remove the board retainer.

4.13.2.8 Identify the extreme right location of PCB1. Refer to Figure 4-13.

Rev. L 4-43B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Serial Number System

A R Y M - 0 0 0 1
4-digit number,
starting at 0001 every month
(“F” indicates that the production
lots are distinguished)

Month of production:
A = January
B = February
C = March
D = April
E = May
F = June
H = July
J = August
K = September
L = October
M = November
N = December

Year of production:
A = 1988 N = 1999
B = 1989 P = 2000
C = 1990 R = 2001
D = 1991 S = 2002
E = 1992 T = 2003
F = 1993 U = 2004
H = 1994 W= 2005
J = 1995 X = 2006
K = 1996 Y = 2007
L - 1997 Z = 2008
M = 1998 A = 2009

Character representing Dräger


company, e.g.:
AR= Dräger Medizintechnik,
Luebeck (Germany)
DR= Dräger Medical, Inc.,
Telford (USA)
ER= National Draeger,
Pittsburgh (USA)

Figure 4-13A. Serial Number Reference Chart

4-43C Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

NOTE: CPU1 PCB is identified as CPU- STANDARD 2; CPU2 PCB contains a 7-


segment LED and is identified as LP-CPU.

4.13.2.9 Carefully unplug the PCB from the motherboard by raising it straight up
and out of its retainer. If you are installing P/N 8604038, skip the next
three steps.

4.13.2.10 On the replacement CPU1 subassembly, locate the solder bridge pads on
the small vertically mounted PCB (see detail in Figure 4-13B). Apply
solder across these pads. DO NOT use the jumper to enable the battery.
CAUTION: Use only soldering iron with a grounded tip.
4.13.2.11 On the replacement CPU1 subassembly, locate the blank battery Replace
By: label p/n 4116949 the on the side wall of the battery and record the
current month plus one year from the current year on the label. If the
replacement CPU1 does not already contain this label, perform the
lithium battery replacement procedure in Section 4.13.1.

4.13.2.12 Remove the daughter PCB with E-prom (E-PROM board) from the
original unit. Using an IC extraction tool, remove the four ICs (Marked
U1 thru U4 in Figure 4-13B) from the original board. With an IC
insertion tool carefully transfer the IC’s to the replacement PCB. Pay
particular attention to the correct location and orientation of the IC
components. The notch in each IC must correspond with the notch in the
board socket. Remove and discard the jumper near the battery marked D
in Figure 4-13B. Transfer the eight remaining jumpers marked J in
Figure 4-13B (ref. P/N 1814508), and the daughter board from the
original to the new PCB and ensure the daughter board is properly
aligned and fully seated in to the sockets. See Figure 4-13B.

4.13.2.13 Insert the replacement PCB into the extreme right motherboard location.
Be certain the PCB is properly aligned and fully seated into the socket.

4.13.2.14 Reinstall the board retainer over the PCB boards.

4.13.2.15 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.2.16 Start the Divan on Service Mode by pressing and holding the left pad of
the Standby button and the pad above it while turning the System Power
switch to ON. Press the rotary knob then rotate it two selections to the
right to display select lang, (Sprachauswahl). Verify and or make the
following adjustments.

Note: Faults Nr. 7, 9, 12, or 21 (Stöung Nr. 7, 9, 12, 21) may be encountered and are
normal immediately upon power-up after CPU1 battery replacement or CPU1 battery
jumper installation.

Rev. L 4-43D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

IC Identification Markings:
U1: R6551P R6551-11 9533
U2: MC68B40CP 00GG6 CT CT BD9644
U3: MC146818P 00GC6 QLEN9620
U4: SANYO LC 356 4S-10 Japan 7JDOG
SOLDER
BRIDGE

DETAIL OF
VERTICAL PCB

D
CPU - STANDARD 2

U1 U2 J

U3

U4
J

SP20603

EPROM BOARD
P/N 8202111

Figure 4-13B. Location of EPROMs and Jumpers on CPU

4-43E Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

Select Language: Press the rotary dial then, select US. Version 07.xx. Press
the rotary knob to exit the function.

Removal Position: Turn the rotary knob to display removal pos., then press
the knob to confirm. The screen will display Adjust Piston, then starting with
the left side of the bar graph half lit, turn the rotary knob to move the
illuminated bar graph one segment to the left. Unlatch the Breasy and attempt
to remove, then install the piston cylinder. Repeat this process until the piston
begins to be difficult to remove, then note this location on the bar graph display.
Now starting with the left side of the bar graph half lit, turn the rotary knob to
move the illuminated bar graph one segment to the right and attempt to remove
then install the piston cylinder. Repeat this process until the piston begins to be
difficult to remove, then note this location on the bar graph display. Determine
the algebraic mean of the two extreme reference points then turn the rotary
knob until the bar graph LED indicates this value. Confirm the piston cylinder
unit can be easily removed and installed. Close the latch on the Breasy. Press
the rotary knob to exit the function.

Select System: Turn the rotary knob to display Select System, then press the
knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary knob to select Cicero EM, then press
the knob to confirm. Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Total Hours: Using a non-conductive tool, set the third DIP switch on the
ADDA PCB to the down position. Turn the rotary knob to display Total Hours,
then press the knob to confirm selection. Reenter the total hours information as
follows:
Rate key increments the 10,000 digit (range 0-2)
I:E key increments the 1,000 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
% I.P./Flow increments the 100 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
PEEP increments the 10 digit (range 0-9)
SIMV Rate increments 1 digit (range 0-9)

Note: If the value is zero the LED segment remains blank. If the 10,000 digit is
set to 2 then the 1,000 and 100 digits can only be altered in the range of 0-5.

Press the Pmax key to enter the displayed value to memory.

Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Operating Hours: Turn the rotary knob to display Operating Hours, then
press the knob to confirm selection. Press the Pmax key to allow information to
be changed as follows:
Rate key increments the 10,000 digit (range 0-2)
I:E key increments the 1,000 digit (range 0-9 or 0-5)
% I.P./Flow increments the 100 digit (range 0-9)
PEEP increments the 10 digit (range 0-9)
SIMV Rate increments 1 digit (range 0-9)

Rev. K 4-43F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Note: If the value is zero the LED segment remains blank. If the 10,000 digit is
set to 2 then the 1,000 and 100 digits can only be altered in the range of 0-5.

Press the Pmax key to enter the displayed value to memory.

Press the rotary knob to exit the function.

Select Parameter: Turn the rotary knob to display Select Parameter, then
press the knob to confirm selection. The display will then indicate Default
Settings. Referring to the chart listed below touch each key to display the
current default value. If a parameter requires adjustment, rotate the knob to set
the correct value.
Parameter Setting
Pmax 25 @ Software Version 7.13
Pmax 30 @ Software Version 7.40
I:E 1.0 : 2.0

Press the rotary knob twice to exit the function.

Display Config: Rotate the knob to show display config., then press the knob
to confirm selection. Scroll the knob to display, Display ON then press the knob
to exit the function.

Confirm Mode: Turn the rotary knob to display Confirm Mode, then press
the knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary knob to select Confirm R-Knob,
then press the knob to exit the function.

Cancel Test: (Applies only to 7.40 Divan Software) Turn the rotary knob to
display Cancel Test, then press the knob to confirm selection. Turn the rotary
knob to select Limited, then press the knob to confirm. Press the rotary knob to
exit the function.

4.13.2.17 Turn the knob to select log book, then press the knob.

4.13.2.18 Press the Pmax key to reset the display to [0000] 000 00H.

4.13.2.19 Using a non-conductive tool return the 3rd DIP switch to its
original (up) position.

4.13.2.20 Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB boards, (at the end of the
PMC).

4.13.2.21 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY, then to ON and


verify that the ventilator successfully completes its self-test
routine.

4.13.2.22 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4-43G Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.13.2.23 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6 of the Narkomed


6000 Technical Service manual.

4.13.3 CPU2, (LP-CPU) p/n 8305664, 8200990 Replacement

CAUTION: The firmware used in the Divan ventilator are installed as a set of
components on CPU1 dauhter PCB and CPU2 PCB. As such the software versions must
be identical.

4.13.3.1 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY. Start the Divan in Service
Mode by pressing the left pad of the STANDBY button and the pad above
it, while turning the System power switch to ON. Rotate the knob to
display LOGBOOK and press the knob. Review the last ten logbook
entries, then press the knob to exit the function.

4.13.3.2 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.3.3 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.3.4 Raise the Divan tabletop cover to its open position.

4.13.3.5 Remove the cover plate at the right side of the Divan assembly.

4.13.3.6 Remove the board retainer.

4.13.3.7 Identify the extreme left location of the PCB2. Refer to Figure 4-13.

NOTE: CPU2 PCB contains a 7-segment LED and is identified as LP- CPU.

4.13.3.8 Remove the ribbon data cable from CPU2 and ADDA PCB’s.

4.13.3.9 Carefully unplug the PCB from the motherboard by raising it straight up
and out of its retainer.

4.13.3.10 Using an IC extraction tool, remove the E-Prom (see Figure 4-13C) from
the original board. With an IC insertion tool carefully transfer the E-
Prom to the replacement PCB. Pay particular attention to the correct pin
alignment and orientation of the E-Prom. The notch in E-Prom must
correspond with the notch in the board socket.

4.13.3.11 Insert the replacement PCB in the appropriate motherboard location. Be


certain the PCB is fully seated in to the socket.

4.13.3.12 Reconnect the ribbon data cable to the ADDA and the CPU2 PCB’s.

Rev. L 4-43H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.13.3.13 Reinstall the board retainer over the PCB boards.

4.13.3.14 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.3.15 Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB boards, (at the end of the
PMC).

4.13.3.16 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY, then to ON and


verify that the ventilator successfully completes its self-test
routine.

4.13.3.17 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4.13.3.18 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6 of the Narkomed


6000 Technical Service manual.

4.13.4 ADDA PCB p/n 8200974, 8200970 Replacement

4.13.4.1 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY. Start the Divan in
Service Mode by pressing the left pad of the STANDBY button and
the pad above it, while turning the System power switch to ON.
Rotate the knob to display LOGBOOK and press the knob. Review
the last ten logbook entries, then press the knob to exit the
function.

4.13.4.2 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.4.3 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull all circuit
breakers to their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.4.4 Raise the Divan tabletop cover to its open position.

4.13.4.5 Remove the cover plate at the right side of the Divan assembly.

4.13.4.6 Remove the board retainer.

4.13.4.7 Identify the central location of the ADDA PCB. Refer to Figure 4-
13.

NOTE: The ADDA PCB contains DIP switches.

4.13.4.8 Remove the ribbon data cable from CPU2 and ADDA PCB’s.

4.13.4.9 Carefully unplug the ADDA PCB from the motherboard by raising
it straight up and out of its retainer.

4-43J Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.13.4.10 On the replacement ADDA PCB set all DIP switches to the up
position. Insert the replacement PCB in the central motherboard
location. Be certain the PCB is fully seated into the socket.

4.13.4.11 Reconnect the ribbon data cable to the ADDA and the CPU2
PCB’s.

4.13.4.12 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.4.13 Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB boards, (at the end of the
PMC).

4.13.4.14 Turn the System Power switch to ON, then follow the Divan
prompts and ensure the Divan successfully completes its self test
routine.

4.13.4.15 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4.13.4.16 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6 of the Narkomed


6000 Technical Service manual.

4.13.5 Divan Software Upgrade Kit p/n 4117024, E-Prom Ver. 7.40 p/n
4116983-001, 4116983-002 Replacement

CAUTION: The firmware E-proms used in the Divan ventilator are installed as
a set of components on CPU1 daughter PCB and CPU2 PCB’s, as such the
software versions on each PCB must be identical.

4.13.5.1 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY. Start the Divan in
Service Mode by pressing the left pad of the STANDBY button and
the pad above it, while turning the System power switch to ON.
Rotate the knob to display LOGBOOK and press the knob. Review
the last ten logbook entries, then press the knob to exit the
function.

4.13.5.2 Turn the System power switch to STANDBY.

4.13.5.3 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull all circuit
breakers to their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.5.4 Raise the Divan tabletop cover to its open position.

4.13.5.5 Remove the cover plate at the right side of the Divan assembly.

4.13.5.6 Remove the board retainer.

Rev. K 4-43K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.13.5.7 Identify the location of CPU1 and CPU2 PCB’s. Refer to Figure 4-
13.

NOTE: CPU1 PCB is in the extreme right location identified as CPU-


STANDARD 2; CPU2 PCB is in the extreme left identified as LP-CPU.

4.13.5.8 Remove the ribbon data cable from CPU2 and ADDA PCB’s.

4.13.5.9 Carefully unplug the CPU1 and CPU2 PCB’s from the
motherboard by raising them straight up and out of their sockets.

4.13.5.10 Locate the E-prom on each PCB. Refer to Figure 4-13C.

4.13.5.11 Using an IC extraction tool, remove the E-prom from each CPU.

4.13.5.12 Using an IC insertion tool carefully install the replacement E-


proms on the correct PCB’s. Pay particular attention to the correct
orientation of the IC components. The notch in each IC must
correspond with the notch in the board socket.

NOTE: Each firmware IC has an identifying label that corresponds with the
CPU. 4116983-001 shall only be used in CPU1, 4116983-002 shall only be used
in CPU2.

4.13.5.13 Reinstall CPU1 and CPU2 PCB’s.

4.13.5.14 Reconnect the data ribbon cable to CPU2 and ADDA PCB’s.

4.13.5.15 Reinstall the board retainer on the top of the PCB boards.

4.13.5.16 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.5.17 Reinstall the cover plate over the PCB boards, (at the end of the
PMC).

4.13.5.18 Turn the System Power switch to ON, then follow the Divan
prompts and ensure the Divan successfully completes its self test
routine.

4.13.5.19 Locate the Operator’s Instruction Manual binder. If the revision


date is before 15 January 2001, remove the existing Operator’s
Instruction Manual and replace it with the new Operator’s
Manual (P/N 4114915-007) supplied in the kit.

4.13.5.20 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4.13.5.21 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6 of the Narkomed


6000 Technical Service manual.

4-43L Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

Sv00447

U U
CPU 1

EPROM
P/N 4116983-001

CPU 2

EPROM
P/N 4116983-002

Figure 4-13B. Location of EPROMs on CPU 1 and CPU 2

Rev. K 4-43M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.13.6 9.0v Nicad Battery p/n 8301856 Replacement on Motherboard

4.13.6.1 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull all circuit
breakers to their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components.

4.13.6.2 Remove the front bumper from the Divan ventilator chassis by
removing the five screws at underside of front bumper; one screw
at right side rail; three screws securing the left side of the bumper
to the bag pole, in order to swing the bumper away from the
ventilator. See Figure 4-13D.

4.13.6.3 Remove the three screws holding the front bar of the ventilator
chassis. (These screws also retain the front display bezel of the
ventilator.) Set the bar aside and carefully pull the front display
bezel downward, and carefully disconnect its ribbon cable from the
motherboard. Set the assembly aside.

4.13.6.4 Locate the 9v Nicad battery before removing it note its orientation
and polarity on the motherboard. Align the positive (+) battery
terminal with the positive (+) marker on the battery holder and
carefully install the replacement battery.

4.13.6.5 Position the display bezel assembly at the front of the ventilator
chassis and carefully reconnect its ribbon cable to the
motherboard.

4.13.6.6 Set the display bezel in place. While holding the bezel assembly in
place, reattach the front bar with the three screws that were
previously removed.

4.13.6.7 Reinstall the front bumper.

4.13.6.8 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.13.6.9 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the
ventilator successfully completes its self-test routine.

4.13.6.10 Enter the parts usage in the replacement parts service menu.

4.13.6.11 Perform the PMC given in Section 6 of the Narkomed 6000


Technical Service manual.

4-43N Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY

FRONT
BAR

BAR
SCREWS
(3X)

BUMPER
RIBBON
CABLE

BUMPER
SCREWS (5X)

Sv00191
9V BATTERY

Figure 4-13D. Location of 9 V Battery on Motherboard

Rev. K 4-43P
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.14 Breathing System

The breathing system includes the breathing circuit connections, inspiratory


and expiratory valves, APL valve, absorber canister, and the diaphragm valves
that are controlled by the Divan ventilator. The breathing system is removable
from the machine as a complete unit. Further disassembly is shown in Figure 4-
14.

NOTE: The absorber canister, located on the bottom of the breathing system,
can be removed with the breathing system in place.

4.14.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.14.2 Disconnect the breathing hoses, bag hose, scavenger hose, and all other
connections to the breathing system.

4.14.3 Open the hinged top of the ventilator.

4.14.4 Turn the breathing system locking bar (¼ turn CCW) to unlock the
breathing system.

4.14.5 Grasp the breathing system handle and lift the unit from the machine

4.14.6 Servicing the diaphragm valves:

4.14.6.1 Loosen the five ¼ turn locking screws to separate the control valve
plate from the base. This provides access to the vent relief and air
inlet valves. These valves can be removed by grasping the valve
handle and turning it counter-clockwise.

4-44 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

CONTROL VALVE
1/4 TURN LOCKING PLATE TOP
SCREWS (5X)

CONTROL VALVE
PLATE BOTTOM

VENT RELIEF VALVE

AIR INLET VALVE

Y7
Y1 Y2 VALVE BASE

Y6
Y3

DIFUSER

ABSORBER
CANISTER

SV00145

Figure 4-14. Breathing System

Rev. K 4-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Figure 4-14A. Bottom View of Control Valve Bottom Plate

4.14.6.2 To access diaphragm valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y6 and Y7, remove the six
Phillips head screws from the bottom of the assembly (see Figure
4-14A). Then turn the assembly over and carefully separate the
top and bottom control valve plates.

4.14.6.3 Note the orientation of diaphragm valves Y1, Y2 and Y3. Transfer
the outer metal ring to the replacement diaphragm and install it
at the correct location on the bottom plate. See Figure 4-14A for
valve location, and Figure 4-14B for valve arrangement.

4-45A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

PNEUMATIC INTERFACE
BLOCK

V2 V3 V6 V1 V7

CONTROL
DIAPHRAGM
VALVE
VALVE PLATE TOP
ARRANGEMENT
Y1,Y2,Y3 VALVE
ARRANGEMENT
DIAPHRAGM Y6,Y7

SV00441 CONTROL VALVE


PLATE BOTTOM

Figure 4-14B. Valve Assemblies

4.14.6.4 Note the orientation of diaphragm valves Y6 and Y7. Remove the
diaphragms from the hub and metal ring, and assemble the
replacement diaphragms in the same manner. Install the
replacement diaphragm assembly at the correct location on the
bottom plate.

4.14.6.5 Place the control valve top plate over the bottom plate and
carefully turn the assembly over. Verify all diaphragm assemblies
are centered into their recess. Reinstall the six Phillips head
screws previously removed.

Rev. K 4-45B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.14.6.6 Exercise the diaphragms and verify their free motion. For each of
the valves, occlude the corresponding numbered port on the
pneumatic interface block at a forward then a backwards stroke
and verify each diaphragm’s ability to maintain vacuum and back
pressure.

4.14.6.7 Ensure that all five ¼ turn locking acrews are fastened when
reassembling the breathing system.

4.14.7 Reinstalling the breathing system:

Lower the unit into place and turn the locking bar (¼ turn CW) to lock
the breathing system in place. When the breathing system is locked
into place, several criteria must be met:

The breathing system must be level (top surface parallel to back edge
of ventilator chassis).

The breathing system must activate the heating unit.

The breathing system must draw up tightly to the lip seals on the
pneumatic interface and piston-cylinder unit when the locking bar is
turned into place.

If adjustments are needed, refer to the appropriate procedure in


Section 5 of this manual.

4.14.8 Reconnect all hoses that were previously disconnected from the
breathing system.

4.14.9 If any components within the breathing system were replaced, perform
the complete PMC Procedure as given in Section 6.

4-46 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.15 Breathing System and Ventilator Lip Seals

Lip seals at the breathing system pneumatic interface, piston-cylinder unit and
ventilator chassis require scheduled replacement. Locations of these seals are
shown in Figure 4-15. Following is a general procedure that applies to all the
seals.

4.15.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.15.2 Disconnect all hoses from the breathing system.

4.15.3 Open the hinged top of the ventilator.

4.15.4 Turn the breathing system locking bar (¼ turn CCW) to unlock the
breathing system.

4.15.5 Remove the breathing system from the machine and set it aside.

4.15.6 Remove the piston-cylinder unit from the ventilator.

4.15.7 Insert a small (approx. 1.5 mm) flat blade screwdriver between the
outer edge of the lip seal and its location hole. Move the screwdriver a
full turn around the seal in order to detach the edge of the seal.

4.15.8 Insert a flat blade (approx. 2.5 to 3 mm) screwdriver through the hole
of the seal and carefully pry the seal from its location hole.

4.15.9 Use the small flat blade screwdriver to remove any residual silicone
from the seal location hole.

CAUTION: Do not occlude the seal or its location hole with silicone cement.

4.15.10 Install the new seal as follows:


-- Squeeze some silicone cement (P/N 1202537) between two pieces of
paper to obtain a thin film.
-- Lightly press and turn the flat side of the new seal on the cement
film, then press the lip seal into its location hole.
-- Allow approximately 30 min. drying time before reinstalling the
piston-cylinder unit.

4.15.11 Reinstall the piston-cylinder unit and the breathing system. Ensure
that the breathing system draws up to the pneumatic interface
properly.

4.15.12 Reconnect all hoses to the breathing system.

Rev. K
4-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.15.13 Turn the System Power switch to ON; observe the ventilator self test
and verify that there are no leaks in the system.

4.15.14 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

PISTON-CYLINDER
UNIT

BREATHING SYSTEM
PNEUMATIC INTERFACE

PATIENT GAS
SCAVENGER OUTLET
CONNECTION
C1

B1

V7
V1
V3
V6
V2

SV00193

Figure 4-15. Lip Seal Locations

Rev. B
4-48
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.16 Ventilator Replacement: Complete Assembly

The Divan ventilator assembly is secured to the frame of the machine by two
screws. Removal of the machine’s back panel is needed for access to the
ventilator cables and pneumatic connections. The following procedure outlines
the removal sequence, with details illustrated in Figure 4-16.

4.16.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.16.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.16.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.16.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.16.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.16.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.16.7 Remove the cylinders from the yokes.

4.16.8 Disconnect AC power from the machine and pull the circuit breaker
knobs to their ‘out’ position.

4.16.9 Disconnect all hoses from the breathing system.

4.16.10 Remove the breathing system form the ventilator chassis.

4.16.11 Remove the piston-cylinder unit from the ventilator chassis.

4.16.12 Remove the front bumper from the ventilator chassis: There are five
screws on the underside of the bumper, and one screw at the right side
rail. You will also need to remove the screws securing the left side of
the bumper to the bag pole flange, in order to swing the bumper away
from the ventilator. (Ref. )

4.16.13 Remove the lower back panel from the machine.

4.16.14 Disconnect the O2 supply line at the regulator assembly (see


illustration).

4.16.15 Disconnect the breathing pressure line from the Divan.

4.16.16 Disconnect the ground wire at the back of the ventilator chassis.

Rev. J 4-49
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00272

GROUND WIRE

CABLE CONNECTORS

GUIDE PIN
SCREWS

O2 SUPPLY
LINE

DETAIL OF PNEUMATIC
CONNECTIONS TO VENTILATOR

BREATHING
PRESSURE
LINE

Figure 4-16. Divan Ventilator Replacement

4-50
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00274

VENTILATOR
CHASSIS

VENTILATOR
MOUNTING SCREWS (2X)

Divan Ventilator Replacement

4-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.16.17 Disconnect the ventilator cable connectors: these are found along the left side
(facing the rear) of the ventilator chassis.

NOTE: The service exchange assembly is only available with painted writing surface.
If your machine is equipped with a stainless steel upgrade, the table tops
must be exchanged.

4.16.18 Remove the two ventilator mounting screws at the underside of the front shelf
rails (see illustration) and carefully slide the ventilator chassis out the front of
the machine.

4.16.19 Position the replacement ventilator chassis on the shelf and slide it back into
position. At the back of the machine, the guide pins in the back rail should line
up with the corresponding holes in the ventilator chassis to allow the chassis
to be moved into position.

If the guide pins do not line up with the holes, loosen the guide pin screws and
move them into alignment; move the ventilator chassis into position and then
tighten the guide pin screws.

4.16.20 Reinstall the two ventilator mounting screws at the underside of the front
shelf rails.

4.16.21 Reconnect all of the ventilator cables.

4.16.22 Reconnect the ground wire at the back of the ventilator chassis.

4.16.23 Reconnect the breathing pressure line.

4.16.24 Reconnect the O2 supply line.

4.16.25 Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

4.16.26 Reinstall the table lamp panel.

4.16.27 Reinstall the front bumper on the ventilator chassis.

4.16.28 Reinstall the piston-cylinder unit in the ventilator chassis.

4.16.29 Reinstall the breathing system in the ventilator chassis, and restore all hose
connections to the breathing system.

4.16.30 Reinstall the cylinders.

4.16.31 Enable the circuit breakers and restore power to the machine.

4.16.32 Locate the Operator’s Instruction Manual binder. If the revision date is before
15 January 2001, remove the existing Operator’s Manual and replace it with
the new Operator’s Manual supplied with the rdplacement Divan.

4.16.33 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-52 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.17 Caster

Each caster is retained by a set screw in the side of the lower frame rail as
shown in Figure 4-17. Caster replacement requires that the machine be tilted
to provide enough clearance for the caster stem to be withdrawn from the
bottom of the frame rail.

NOTE: Front caster replacement on early machines requires that the lower
frame cover (skirt) be removed for access to the caster set screws. Refer
to replacement procedure 4.28.

WARNING: Do not raise the side of the machine more than 3 inches, or the
minimum clearance needed to remove the caster. Failure to observe this
precaution may result in a tip-over, causing personal injury.

4.17.1 Remove all vaporizers, unsecured equipment and accessories from the
machine.

4.17.2 Remove the lower frame cover (skirt) from the machine. Refer to the
appropriate procedure in this section.

4.17.3 Lock the front casters.

4.17.4 Obtain a pallet mover, hydraulic jack or similar lifting device and a
brace capable of supporting one side of the machine with its casters
approximately three inches from the floor. Block the caster wheels
opposite to the side that will be raised. Remove the affected caster’s
retaining set screw.

4.17.5 Using at least two people to steady the machine, raise one side only
enough to clear the frame well. DO NOT EXCEED THREE INCHES.
Slip the new caster into the well and lower the machine to within ¼ in.
of the floor.

4.17.6 Align the replacement caster and hold it in its seated position. Apply
Loctite #222 (purple) to the set screw threads, then tighten the caster
stem set screw.

4.17.7 Using at least two people, remove the support brace then carefully
lower the machine to the floor.

4.17.8 Reinstall the skirt on the machine.

4.17.9 Check for proper operation of the caster and ensure that the front
casters lock properly.

4.17.10 Reinstall any unsecured equipment and accessories that were


previously removed.

Rev. K 4-53
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.17.11 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6, including a vaporizer


calibration verification.

SV00054

*P

2 TO 3
INCHES

ACCESS HOLE FOR CASTER


*P=LOCTITE #222 (PURPLE) STEM SET SCREW

Figure 4-17. Caster Replacement

4-54 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.18 Battery

The backup battery bank comprises four batteries and is located in a


compartment below the cabinet drawer. Access to the battery compartment
requires removal of the drawer and drawer housing. Battery mounting and
connection details are shown in Figure 4-18.

WARNING:Ensure that AC power is removed from the machine before opening


the battery compartment. Failure to observe this precaution may cause
injury by electric shock.

4.18.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.

4.18.2 Pull all circuit breakers to their ‘out’ positions.

4.18.3 Pull the drawer out to its fully extended position and lift it from the
tracks.

4.18.4 Remove the drawer housing from the machine.

4.18.5 Remove the battery cover and retainer bracket.

4.18.6 Note the polarity markings, connections and orientation of the


batteries so that the replacement batteries can be installed in the same
manner.

4.18.7 Disconnect and remove the batteries.

4.18.8 Position the replacement batteries in the compartment and connect


them in the same manner as the original ones.

4.18.9 Reinstall the battery retainer bracket and cover.

4.18.10 Reinstall the drawer housing.

4.18.11 Pull the drawer tracks out to their fully extended position and reinstall
the drawer. Ensure that it operates correctly.

4.18.12 Enable the circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

4.18.13 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. A
4-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00273

BATTERY WIRE BATTERY (4X)


HARNESS

BATTERY
CONNECTOR CABLE
ASSEMBLIES (3X)

COVER
RETAINER
BRACKET

BRACKET
DRAWER HOUSING SCREWS (2X)
(DRAWER REMOVED)

DRAWER
HOUSING
SCREWS (4X)

Figure 4-18. Battery Replacement

Rev. A
4-56
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.19 Power Supplies

The power supplies are contained in a box at the bottom of the machine, secured
to the lower frame rails. This box also contains the circuit breakers and power
entry. The internal components are not serviced in the field. The power supply
mounting and connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4-19.

NOTE: The labeling on the power supply must include the following:
MODEL CPS12007 REV: D (or later)
NAD P/N 4114431 REV: F (or later)
All earlier revisions must be replaced.

4.19.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.19.2 Close all cylinder valves except for one O2 cylinder.

4.19.3 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

4.19.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

4.19.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain pressure from the system.

4.19.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.19.7 Wait one minute for NT operating system in WPU to shut down.

WARNING:Ensure that AC power is removed from the machine before servicing


the power supply. Failure to observe this precaution may cause injury
by electric shock.

4.19.8 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ’out’ position. Loosen the AC power cord retainer bracket and
unplug the cord from the power supply.

4.19.9 Remove the cylinders from the yokes.

4.19.10 Remove the lower left back panel from the machine.

4.19.11 Disconnect all cables from the communication ports, and swing open
the door with the communication ports.

4.19.12 Disconnect all of the cables at the top rear of the power supply box, and
unplug the convenience outlet cord.

4.19.13 Place a support under the power supply box to hold it in place while the
attaching screws are being removed.

Rev. J
4-57
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00053

CONNECTOR ID

J2 J4 J3 J6
J7 J1 J5

POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
BAT AC

CIRCUIT
AUX BREAKERS
POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY

Figure 4-19. Power Supply Replacement

4-58 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.19.14 Remove the four screws attaching the power supply box to the frame
rails, and slide the box out from under the machine.

4.19.15 Verify that the replacement power supply bears the correct labeling.
See the Note at the beginning of this procedure.

4.19.16 Position the replacement power supply box under the machine and
secure it to the frame rails with the hardware that was previously
removed.

4.19.17 Verify that the circuit breakers are in their ‘out’ position.

4.19.18 If needed, install a CAUTION High Voltage label (P/N 4115070) on the
battery pack’s red wire harness near the power supply connector
located at J5 of the power supply.

4.19.19 Reconnect all of the cables and the convenience outlet cord.

4.19.20 Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

4.19.21 Close the communication port panel and reconnect any cables that
were previously disconnected.

Rev. K
4-59
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.19.22 When re-attaching the 2-pin wire harness to the Vitalbus Hub at J13,
verify its proper orientation. From the header connector the wires must
route to the right as shown in Figure 4-19A, with the brown wire above
the black wire.

BROWN WIRE

Figure 4-19A. J13 Connector Orientation

NOTE: You must install the power cord as described in the next step.
The cable clamp arrangement is designed to prevent accidental
disconnect.

Rev. K
4-59A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.19.23 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch
diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus
HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord
socket as shown in Figure 4-19B.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-19B. Power Cord Routing

4.19.24 Reinstall the cylinders in their yokes.

4.19.25 Reconnect the pipeline supplies.

4.19.26 Enable the circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

4.19.27 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the power-up self
test is successfully completed.

4.19.28 If the machine is equipped with a flat panel display, perform the
position, brightness, contrast and phase calibrations given in Section 5.

4.19.29 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. K
4-59B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.20 Processor Assembly

The processor assembly is located in the lower part of the machine, below the ventilator.
Access to the assembly requires removal of the lower left back panel and disconnecting
the power supply cables. The processor mounting and connection arrangement is shown
in Figure 4-20.
NOTE: If a new processor is installed in the field, then a new machine serial number
needs to be entered on the NM6K page of the machine’s Service Config notebook. If you
are not able to make this entry, then contact DrägerService for more information. Be
sure to properly document the processor exchange.
CAUTION: All processors are shipped from DMI with the current versionof released
software. Software Version 2.06 is scheduled for release on 21 May 2001. If the original
processor is of an earlier vintage, upgrade 2.06 kit 4117240 must be installed to ensure
proper system performance. If the machine is configured with an Integrated Patient
Monitor (IPM), the part number on the pod must be 4113465-005. If the pod is of an
earlier vintage, an updated IPM pod P/N SE4113465-005 and IPM Operator’s Manual
P/N 4116574-002 must be installed to ensure proper operation. If the software version of
the processor can not be determined, use the GAP part number for identification
purposes. If the part number is £ 4112970-005, install upgrade 2.06 kit 4117240. Refer
to TSB 6007 for additional information.
CAUTION: There are three different processor styles currently in use in the Narkomed
6000. The correct choice is essential to ensure the units proper operation and
compatibility with optional PODs. Refer to the following options:
Option 1: P/N 4114467 or SE4114467 contain a 166 MHz processor w/32 Meg RAM and
4 communication ports. Will not support IPMM or SCR PODs. Use replacement part
SE4115904.
Option 2: P/N 4115904 (aka 4115905) or SE4115904 contain a 233 porocessor w/64 Meg
RAM and 4 communication ports. Will suport GAP, IPMM and SCR PODs. This style
processor can be used as a direct replacement for 4114467, SE4114467, 4115904, (aka
4115905) or SE4115904.
Option 3: PN 4116918 (aka 4116725) or SE4116918 contain a 700 MHz processor w/64
Meg RAM and 1 communication port. Will suport GAP, IPMM and SCR PODs. This
style processor can only be used as a direct replacement for 4114467, SE4114467,
4115904 (aka 4115905) or SE4115904 after converting the Vitalbus Hub to a single
communication port configuration. Refer to Section 7.11 for conversion instructions.
4.20.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON. Refer to the “Service Parts Screens” and
record all pertinent component replacement information. This information
must be entered into the replacement processor.
4.20.2 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.20.3 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to their ’out’
position.

4.20.4 Close all cylinder valves and remove the cylinders from the yokes.
4.20.5 Disconnect all external cables from the communication HUB, and swing open
the door with the communication HUB.
4.20.6 Remove the lower left back panel from the machine.

4-60 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

LOW FLOW WIZARD LABEL

PROCESSOR
ASSEMBLY

CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)

SV00049

WPU

POWER FILTER
AND MOUNTING
BRACKET

PHILLIPS HEAD
SCREWS

TO J1 ON POWER SUPPLY

CONNECTOR NOT USED


(FOR FUTURE SATURN APPLICATIONS)

Figure 4-20. Processor Assembly Replacement

Rev. K 4-61
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.20.7 Disconnect all of the cables at the top rear of the power supply box, and move
them out of the way.
4.20.8 If needed, install a CAUTION High Voltage label (P/N 4115070) on the battery
pack’s red wire harness near the power supply connector located at J5 of the
power supply.
4.20.9 Disconnect all of the cables except the DC power cable, from the right side
(facing the rear of the machine) of the processor assembly.
4.20.10 Loosen the four captive mounting screws securing the processor to the
machine. You will need a long extension screwdriver to reach these screws.
4.20.11 Pull the processor assembly straight back and out of the machine.
4.20.12 For shipping it is necessary to remove the power filter and bracket from the
WPU chassis. Loosen the two Phillips head screws securing the power filter
mounting bracket to the processor chassis. Slide out the bracket, then
retighten the screws.
4.20.13 Record the removed processor’s serial number, then properly package the
assembly for return to DrägerService using the packaging from the
replacement processor.
4.20.14 On the replacement processor, attach the power filter mounting bracket to the
chassis.
4.20.15 Record the replacement processor’s serial number, then slide the assembly
into place and secure it with the captive mounting screws.
4.20.16 Reconnect all of the processor cables that were previously disconnected.
4.20.17 Reconnect all of the power supply cables that were previously disconnected.
4.20.18 Keylok installation:
4.20.18.1 Low Flow Wizard:
If the machine is a DMI Demo unit or contains a Low Flow Wizard label near the serial
number plate, this feature must be activated after the processor is replaced. If the
software version is 1.06 - 2.05, contact DMI’s Technical Service Department to obtain
instructions to enable and test this feature. If the application software version is ³ 2.06,
activation of this feature requires a *Low Flow Wizard keylok assembly P/N 4116920-
001 installed in the processor’s parallel port. *If the machine contains both Low Flow
Wizard enabled and Air-Only labels near the serial number plate, then a combination
Low Flow Wizard & Air-Only keylok P/N 4116920-003 is required.
4.20.18.2 Air-Only Mode:
If the machine contains an Air-Only Mode label near the serial number plate, this
feature must be activated after the processor is replaced.If the software version is 2.05,
contact DMI’s Technical Service Department to obtain instructions to enable and test
this feature. If the application software version is ³ 2.06, activation of this feature
requires an *Air-Only keylok assembly P/N 4116920-002 installed in the processor’s
parallel port. *If the machine contains both Low Flow Wizard enabled and Air-Only
labels near the serial number plate, then a combination Low Flow Wizard & Air-Only
keylok P/N 4116920-003 is required.

Rev. L
4-61A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SERIAL PORT
700 MHZ PROCESSOR POWER CABLE

SV00450

Figure 4-20A. WPU Connector Labeling

Rev. K 4-61B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.20.19 Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

4.20.20 When re-attaching the 2-pin wire harness to the Vitalbus Hub at J13,
verify its proper orientation. From the header connector the wires must
route to the right as shown in Figure 4-20D, with the brown wire above
the black wire.

BROWN WIRE

Figure 4-20D. J13 Connector Orientation

4.20.21 Close the communication HUB panel and reconnect any cables that
were previously disconnected.

4-62 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.20.22 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch
diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus
HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord
socket as shown in Figure 4-20E.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-20E. Power Cord Routing

4.20.23 Reinstall the cylinders in their yokes.

4.20.24 Reconnect the pipeline supplies.

4.20.25 Enable the circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

4.20.26 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the power-up self
test is successfully completed.

NOTE: If system does not power up, toggle the processor’s power switch.

4.20.27 If the machine is equipped with a flat panel display, perform the
position, brightness, contrast and phase calibrations given in Section 5.

4.20.28 Refer to the “NM6K Configuration Page” in Section 2 to re-enter the


serial number into the machine’s memory.

4.20.29 Re-enter all pertinent component replacement information into the


“Service Parts Screen”.

Rev. L 4-62A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.20.30 Verify installation of pressure gauge option:


--Press the To Secondary Keys key on the main screen task bar.
--Press the Utilities key to open the Utilities notebook
--Touch the Pressure Gauge tab and verify that the pressure gauge
option feature is enabled.
--Close the Pressure Gauge notebook.

4.20.31 Software Option Reconfiguration:

4.20.31.1 Audible O2 whistle:


If the machine is a CSA version with an audible O2 whistle, this
feature must be activated after the processor is replaced. If the
application software is v1.07 - 2.05, contact DMI’s Technical
Service Department to obtain instructions to enable and test this
feature. If the application software version is ³ 2.06 this feature
must be re-enabled in the advanced service screen.

4.20.31.2 Low Flow Wizard:


If the machine is a DMI Demo unit or contains a Low Flow Wizard
label near the serial number plate, this feature must be activated
after the processor is replaced. If the software version is 1.06 -
2.05, contact DMI’s Technical Service Department to obtain
instructions to enable and test this feature. If the application
software version is ³ 2.06, this feature must be re-enabled in the
advanced service screen.

4.20.31.3 Air-Only Mode:


If the machine contains an Air-Only Mode label near the serial
number plate, this feature must be activated after the processor is
replaced. If the software version is 2.05, contact DMI’s Technical
Service Department to obtain instructions to enable and test this
feature. If the application software version is ³ 2.06, this feature
must be re-enabled in the advanced service screen.

4.20.32 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-62B Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.21 VPO Assembly

The VPO assembly comprises an L-shaped bracket that holds a PCB assembly,
speakers, and the sensor interface connectors which project through clearance
holes in the front panel of the machine. The communication port door must be
opened for access to the VPO assembly. The mounting arrangement is shown in
Figure 4-21. Audio wiring details are shown in the illustration at the end of this
procedure.

4.21.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.21.2 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ’out’ position.

4.21.3 Disconnect the breathing pressure line, flow sensor cord and O2 sensor
cord from the sensor interface panel on the front of the machine.

CAUTION: Use ESD protection when handling the VPO assembly. The PCB
contains static sensitive devices.

4.21.4 Disconnect any external communication cables from the machine, and
swing open the communication port door.

4.21.5 Disconnect the cables from the PCB on the VPO assembly. Mark or
note their positions so that they can be reconnected to the replacement
assembly in the same manner.

4.21.6 Remove the hardware securing the VPO assembly to the machine, and
remove the assembly.

NOTE: Early model machines require a special long-reach tool (P/N 4115140)
to remove the front mounting nuts

4.21.7 Position the replacement VPO assembly in the machine and secure it
with the hardware that was previously removed.

4.21.8 Reconnect all of the cables that were previously disconnected.

Rev. L
4-63
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00055

VPO ASSEMBLY

J4 (VENTILATOR)

J2 (VITALBUS)

FRONT MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
J10 (MINIMUM
FLOW SOLENOID)

SPEAKER WIRING

SIDE MOUNTING SCREWS (2X)

Figure 4-21. VPO Assembly

4-64
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.21.9 Close the communication port door and reconnect any cables that were
previously disconnected.

4.21.10 Re-connect any Vitalbus Hub cables that may have been disconnected
in the process. Ensure that the wire harness at J13 is oriented as
described in the next step.

4.21.11 When re-attaching the 2-pin wire harness to the Vitalbus Hub at J13,
verify its proper orientation. From the header connector the wires must
route to the right as shown in Figure 4-21A, with the brown wire above
the black wire.

BROWN WIRE

Figure 4-21A. J13 Connector Orientation

Rev. K
4-64A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.21.12 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch
diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus
HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord
socket as shown in Figure 4-21B.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-21B. Power Cord Routing

4.21.13 Reconnect the breathing pressure line, flow sensor cord and O2 sensor
cord to the sensor interface panel on the front of the machine.

4-64B Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.21.14 Enable the circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

4.21.15 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the power-up self
test is successfully completed.

4.21.16 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

16 IN.
YEL
GRN

P6 P1

YEL
GRN VPO
19 IN.
ASM BRN
RED

19 IN.
BRN
RED
PRIMARY AUDIO

MINI
JACK
AUDIO
SYSTEM
OUT I/O BOARD
J10
VITALBUS
HUB ASM J11

WPU J12

Figure 4-21C. Audio Wiring

Rev. K
4-65
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.22 Vitalbus Hub PCB Assembly

The vitalbus hub assembly includes the hinged door at the back of the machine,
comm port connectors, AC convenience receptacle, fan, and PCB assembly The
arrangement is shown in Figure 4-22. Following is the sequence for
replacement of the PCB assembly.

NOTE: If the machine has a later design WPU with one communication port,
the Vitalbus assembly will have an iso port arrangement with alternate
connections to the WPU. Refer to Figure 4-22A for cable connection details.

4.22.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.22.2 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ’out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD protection when handling the PCB assembly. The PCB
contains static sensitive devices.

4.22.3 Disconnect any external communication cables from the connectors on


the vitalbus assembly door, and swing open the door.

4.22.4 Disconnect the cables from the vitalbus hub PCB assembly. Mark or
note their positions so that they can be reconnected to the replacement
assembly in the same manner.

NOTE: Verify that the power supply wire harness from power supply J3 to the
Vitalbus hub has a ferrite core noise suppression filter at the power
supply end. If not, install a filter (P/N 4115155, split design) on the
wire harness 1¼ in. from the power supply connector. Install a tie strap
on either side of the filter to keep it in place.

4.22.5 Remove the assembly from the machine at the hinge.

Rev. K
4-66
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

J2 DATA
FROM
J3 POWER PROCESSOR
(LATER DESIGN)

VITALBUS ASSEMBLY
WITH ISO PORT

COMM PORT
CONNECTORS (4X)
CONVENIENCE OUTLET (FROM PROCESSOR)
POWER CORD
TIE STRAP

J1 (PROCESSOR
NETWORK CONNECTION)

J2 (TO VPO ASSEMBLY)

VITALBUS PCB ASSEMBLY

J4 J3 J9
POWER
J13
J6 J5

J12
J8 J7
(TO SPEAKERS ON
J11 VPO ASSEMBLY)

SV00289

J10 (SYS I/O)

Figure 4-22. Vitalbus Hub Assembly

Rev. K
4-67
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

J2 ISO PORT CABLE SERIAL PORT


P/N 4116861 POWER CABLE
P/N 4116859

AUDIO CABLE
J3 P/N 4114502

COM 2
PORT

SV00445

Figure 4-22A. Iso Port Cable Connections

4-67A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.22.6 Install the replacement assembly with the hardware that was
previously removed.

NOTE: Ensure that the convenience outlet power cord is routed down along
the side of the fan, and away from electronic components on the PCB.

4.22.7 When re-attaching the 2-pin wire harness to the Vitalbus Hub at J13,
verify its proper orientation. From the header connector the wires must
route to the right as shown in Figure 4-22B, with the brown wire above
the black wire.

BROWN WIRE

Figure 4-22B. J13 Connector Orientation

Rev. K
4-67B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.22.8 Close the vitalbus assembly door and reconnect any cables that were
previously disconnected.

4.22.9 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch
diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus
HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord
socket as shown in Figure 4-22C.

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-22C. Power Cord Routing

4.22.10 Enable the circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

4.22.11 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the power-up self
test is successfully completed.

4.22.12 Verify that any devices connected to the vitalbus hub are working
properly.

4.22.13 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-67C Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

This page intentionally left blank

Rev. K
4-67D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.23 Agent Analyzer Assembly; Lithium Battery (TK-RAM IRIA) Replacement

The agent analyzer assembly is contained in a replaceable module that slides into an
opening in the left (facing the front of the machine) side of the machine. Access to
connections at the back of the module require removal of the flowmeter housing back
cover. The general arrangement is shown in Figure 4-23.
CAUTION: All agent analyzers are shipped from DMI with the current version E-
PROM and mechanical modifications. If the original analyzer part number is £ 4112970-
005, upgrade 2.06 kit 4117240 must be installed to ensure proper system performance.
If the machine is configured with an Integrated Patient Monitor (IPM), the part number
of this pod must be 4113465-005. If the pod is of an earlier vintage, an updated IPM pod
P/N SE4113465-005 and IPM Operator’s Manual P/N 4116574-002 must be installed to
ensure proper operation. If the original GAP part number can not be determined, use
the Narkomed 6000 system software version to determine if the upgrade kit is required.
All software versions < 2.06 must be updated. Refer to TSB 6007 for additional
information.
4.23.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.23.2 Disconnect the patient sample line at the water trap.
4.23.3 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.
4.23.4 Disconnect the Vitalbus cable and the exhaust line at the back of the agent
analyzer.
4.23.5 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the agent analyzer and remove the
assembly from the machine.
4.23.6 For replacement of the lithium battery on the IRIA board:
CAUTION: Use ESD protection when servicing the analyzer assembly. Static
discharge can damage PC board components.
4.23.6.1 Remove the cover from the analyzer assembly (four screws on the
bottom, one screw at the back).
4.23.6.2 Loosen the two upper screws securing the left side panel of the analyzer,
and swing open the panel as shown in the illustration.
4.23.6.3 Locate the lithium battery at the upper right corner of the IRIA board,
and carefully release the clips securing the battery to the I.C. Do not
damage the PC board.
4.23.6.4 Install the replacement battery onto the I.C. - oriented the same as the
original battery.
4.23.6.5 Close the left side of the analyzer and tighten the retaining screws.
NOTE: The following procedure must be performed after replacement of the IRIA
Time Keeper battery to prevent corruption of the IRIA pod log:
The following items are needed for the IRIA pod log verification:
-- Vitalbus cable, P/N 4113065-001
-- IRIA Download cable, P/N 4115443
-- Service laptop with IRIA.EXE, H_IRIA.TXT, IRIA_HEL.TXT, and IRIA.CFG.
*Place these files in C:\NAD software\nm6k\IRIA time
Create the folders where needed.

4-68 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

* these files can be obtained via Lotusnotes software bulletin board or


by contacting Draeger Medical, Inc., Technical Service Department.
4.23.6.5A Unplug the AC power cord and disable all machine circuit
breakers.
4.23.6.5B Disconnect the 10-conductor ribbon cable from the IRIA
PCB assembly.
4.23.6.5C Attach the 10-conductor ribbon connector of the IRIA
Download cable to the IRIA PCB assembly.
4.23.6.5D Connect the DB9 end of the Download cable to the COM1
port of the laptop computer.
4.23.6.5E Connect the additional Vitalbus cable to the existing
vitalbus cable, then attach the extended cable assembly to
the Gap’s Vitalbus port.
4.23.6.5F Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit
breakers.

NOTE: The machine must remain at STANDBY during this test.

4.23.6.5G Turn on the laptop and execute the Iria.exe application.


4.23.6.5H Information displayed on the laptop should appear as
shown in Figure 4-23A.
4.23.6.5I Locate the Date field in the box at the upper right of the
screen. Verify the displayed date is a valid calendar date
and is NOT being displayed in Hexadecimal.
Date field= day. month. Year
4.23.6.5J Locate the Time field in the box at the upper right of the
screen. Verify the displayed time is correctly showing
seconds and minutes.
Time= Hours. Minutes. Seconds
4.23.6.5K If the Time and Date are correct, skip to Step 4.23.6.5Q.
4.23.6.5L If either the Time or Date fields are corrupted, press the
F2 key. An additional box will appear in the upper left of
the screen as shown in Figure 4-23B.
4.23.6.5M Scroll down to Set time and press Enter.
4.23.6.5N Enter the correct time and date as follows:
hh.mm.ss : dd.mm.jj
h= hours d= day
m= minute m= month
s= second j= year
4.23.6.5P Verify the correct date is now displayed and that seconds
and minutes are properly incrementing.

Rev. K 4-68A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.23.6.5Q Press ESC to exit and press Y to confirm you want to quit
the program.
4.23.6.5R Turn off the laptop, unplug the machine AC power cord
and disable all circuit breakers.
4.23.6.5S Remove the Download and Vitalbus cables.

F1:Help | F2:Settings | F3/Esc:END | F4:Zero | F6:Error log

----- Ident of IRIA -----


---------------V1.8e-
Name: : DWHLMT
------ Status messages -----
Revision : 02.17
System error : Error.......
Auto test : OK.......... Serial Nr. : ARMC0149
Status : Zero fail.... Date : 4.8.0
Accuracy : Reduced.... Time : 17.42.22
Flow system : OK........... operation : 9292h46
Flow rate : Low......... ---- Measured value ----
Zero adjustment : Automatic.. O2 : 0.0 Vol%
Channel limit: Agas : OK............ CO2 : 0.0 Vol%
N2O : OK............. N2O : “red” Vol%
CO2 : OK............. too low... : “red” Vol%
Pres : OK............ Pressure :749.6 mmHg
Solenoid : Patient...... 999.1hPa
Watertrap, Julian : OK............ ident. agent: too low...

Figure 4-23A.

Input
18.30.00. 03.08.00
hh.mm.ss. dd.mm.jj

Figure 4-23B.

4.23.6.6 Reinstall the cover on the analyzer.

4-68B Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00052

GAS ANALYZER POD

BACK VIEW

VITALBUS

EXHAUST LINE CONNECTION

VITALBUS CONNECTION (FROM J3 ON VITALBUS HUB)

Figure 4-23. Agent Analyzer Assembly

4-69
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

LITHIUM
BATTERY

SV00277

Lithium Battery Replacement

Rev. A
4-70
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.23.7 Slide the replacement analyzer into the machine and secure it with its
captive mounting screw.

4.23.8 Reconnect the Vitalbus cable at the back of the analyzer.

4.23.9 Perform the agent analyzer flow rate adjustment given in Section 5.

4.23.10 Reconnect the exhaust line at the back of the analyzer.

4.23.11 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

4.23.12 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

4-71
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.24 CRT Assembly

The CRT assembly (monitor) is not field serviced, but is replaced as a complete
assembly. Access to the monitor requires removing several panels on the
machine. The mounting and connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4-24.

4.24.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Remove AC power from
the machine and pull all circuit breakers to their ‘out’ position.

4.24.2 Remove the upper left (facing the back of the machine) back panel from
the machine.

4.24.3 At the front of the machine, remove the table lamp panel below the
monitor.

4.24.4 If applicable, remove the two adjustment shaft extensions that project
below the monitor shelf by pulling them straight off. (See illustration.)

WARNING: Do not touch any part of the CRT circuitry, as there could be a
stored charge in high voltage portion of the circuit.

4.24.5 Disconnect the power, video and touch screen cables from the monitor.

4.24.6 Remove the four screws from the underside of the monitor shelf, and
slide the monitor out the back of the machine.

4.24.7 Separate the in-line connector for the degaussing coil. Inspect the coil
for damage; measure its resistance to chassis to ensure the coil is not
shorted to the chassis. If necessary, replace the coil as follows:

4.24.8 Remove the six screws holding the front bezel assembly to the cabinet,
and carefully remove the bezel.

4.24.9 Note the arrangement of the tie straps holding the bottom of the
degaussing coil to the bezel - so that the replacement coil can be
installed in the same manner. Cut and remove the tie straps.

4.24.10 Remove the screws holding the left and right coil brackets (mark these
pieces so they can be reinstalled in the same manner), and remove the
degaussing coil from the bezel.

...................................................................................................................

4.24.11 Install the replacement coil in the bezel with its arrows pointing
forward, toward the front of the bezel.

Secure the coil with the left and right brackets at the top, and two new
tie straps at the bottom.

Rev. J
4-72
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

CONNECTIONS
TO MONITOR

TOUCH SCREEN

POWER

VIDEO

MONITOR
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)

SHAFT EXTENSIONS
FOR BRIGHTNESS AND
CONTRAST CONTROLS
EARLY MODELS ONLY
(REMOVE BEFORE SLIDING
MONITOR INTO OR OUT OF CABINET)

SV00050

Figure 4-24. CRT Assembly Replacement

Rev. A
4-73
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

DEGAUSSING BRACKET SCREWS (4X)


COIL

FRONT
BEZEL

COIL
BRACKETS
(L & R)

SV00288

BEZEL
SCREWS (6X)

Degaussing Coil Replacement

4-74
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.24.12 Reinstall the bezel assembly in the cabinet, and join the in-line
connector for the degaussing coil.

4.24.13 Slide the replacement monitor in from the back of the machine (make
sure there are no shaft extensions present), and reinstall the four
screws that were previously removed.

4.24.14 Reconnect the power, video and touch screen cables to the monitor.

4.24.15 If applicable, reinstall the two shaft extensions by pressing them into
place through the holes in the underside of the monitor shelf.

4.24.16 At the front of the machine, reinstall the table lamp panel below the
monitor.

4.24.17 Enable the circuit breakers and restore AC power to the machine.

4.24.18 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.24.19 Following the power-up self test, exercise the touch screen and display
functions to determine if CRT adjustments are needed. If adjustment is
needed, refer to the procedure given in Section 5.

4.24.20 Perform the touch screen calibration procedure given in Section 5.

4.24.21 Reinstall the back panel of the machine.

4.24.22 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. J
4-75
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.24A Flat Panel Display Assembly

The flat panel display includes two additional PCB assemblies and cables.
Access to the display and related assemblies requires removal of several panels
from the machine. Mounting and connection arrangements are shown in Figure
4-24A.

4.24A.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Remove AC power from
the machine and pull all circuit breakers to their ‘out’ position.

4.24A.2 Remove the upper left (facing the back of the machine) back panel from
the machine.

4.24A.3 If you are replacing the PCB assembly supplied with the flat panel
display, remove the table lamp panel at the front of the machine, and
remove the PCB assembly. This PCB assembly is attached to the panel
with screws. On machines that include a strip chart recorder on the
panel, the PCB is attached by a snap-in arrangement.

4.24A.4 Disconnect the power, video, touch screen, and 9-cond. ribbon cables
from the flat panel display.

4.24A.5 Remove the six screws holding the display assembly to the cabinet, and
remove the assembly.

4.24A.6 Install the replacement display assembly in the cabinet with the
hardware that was removed in the previous step.

4.24A.7 If applicable, install the replacement PCB assembly on the back of the
table lamp panel. Route the 9-cond. ribbon cable up through the bottom
of the cabinet in the same manner as the original.

4.24A.8 Reconnect the power, video, touch screen, and 9-cond. ribbon cables to
the display assembly. Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

4.24A.9 Enable the circuit breakers and restore AC power to the machine.

4.24A.10Turn the System Power switch to ON.

4.24A.11 Verify that the display is working.

4.24A.12Perform the Flat Panel Display Brightness, Contrast and Phase


adjustments given in Section 5.

4.24A.13Perform the touch screen calibration procedure given in Section 5.

4.24A.14Reinstall the table lamp panel.

4.24A.15Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. J
4-75A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

FLAT PANEL POWER CABLE


DISPLAY

POWER PCB ASM


MOUNTING SCREWS
AND LOCKWASHERS (4X)

DISPLAY ASM
MOUNTING
SCREWS AND
LOCKWASHERS (6X)

VIDEO
CABLE

TOUCHSCREEN
CABLE

POWER PCB ASM

9-COND. RIBBON
CABLE SUPPLIED WITH
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY

PCB ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS
LAMP ASSEMBLY- AND
NM6000 (REF) LOCKWASHERS (4X)
(SEE TEXT)

PCB ASSEMBLY
SV00379
SUPPLIED WITH
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY

Figure 4-24A. Flat Panel Display Assembly

Rev. H
4-75B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.25 Table Lamp

The table lamp assembly includes the panel above the ventilator, two lamp
assemblies, a rocker switch and wire harness as shown in Figure 4-25. Each
lamp assembly contains a replaceable 12 V high intensity halogen bulb.

NOTE: If a strip chart recorder asembly is included on the panel, refer to


Paragraph 4.25A for details on the recorder mounting and connection
arrangement.

4.25.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.25.2 Remove the panel retainer screws and pull the assembly forward far
enough to gain access to the in-line connector.

4.25.3 Carefully separate the in-line connector on the wire harness.

4.25.4 Loosen the jam nut on the assembly where the lamp is to be replaced,
and remove the assembly from its bracket on the panel.

4.25.5 Gently pry up on the bulb cover lip while sliding it from the housing.

4.25.6 Remove the bulb by sliding it out of its socket.

CAUTION: The replacement bulb must be properly cleaned and handled or


premature failure may result. Do not touch the glass envelope of the
replacement bulb with your bare hands, as finger oil will damage the bulb. Use
examination gloves to prevent soiling of the replacement bulb. Use isopropyl
alcohol to clean the replacement bulb of oil residue.

4.25.7 Install the replacement bulb in the socket in the same manner as the
original.

4.25.8 Reinstall the bulb cover on the lamp assembly, and reattach the
assembly to the panel. Tighten the jam nut.

4.25.9 Join the in-line connector to the wire harness on the machine.

4.25.10 Reinstall the lamp panel and its trim piece with the hardware that was
previously removed.

4.25.11 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the lamp is
working properly.

Rev. K
4-76
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

LIP

BULB BULB COVER

IN-LINE CONNECTOR

JAM NUT

LAMP HOLDER

LAMP

BULB COVER

HOUSING

PANEL
TRIM PIECE

PANEL RETAINER SV00149


SCREWS (4X)

Figure 4-25. Lamp Assembly Replacement

Rev. K 4-77
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.25A Strip Chart Recorder Assembly

The optional strip chart recorder assembly is contained within the table lamp
panel. This option is available only on machines with a flat-screen display.
Except for lamp replacement (see Paragraph 4.25) and chart paper, the panel
assembly is not serviced in the field but is replaced as a complete assembly
when needed. Figure 4-25A shows the arrangement of the strip chart recorder
assembly.

4.25A.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.25A.2 Remove the panel retainer screws and pull the assembly forward far
enough to gain access to the connectors.

4.25A.3 Carefully separate the in-line connector on the power wire harness.

4.25A.4 Disconnect the Vitalbus cable.

4.25A.5 Carefully remove the display control PCB from the assembly (it
mounts by a snap-in arrangement), and remove the recorder assembly
from the machine.

4.25A.6 Install the the display control PCB on the replacement strip chart
recorder assembly.

4.25A.7 Connect the Vitalbus cable and power connector to the assembly.

4.25A.8 Reinstall the lamp panel and its trim piece with the hardware that was
previously removed.

4.25A.9 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify that the lamp is
working properly.

4.25A.10Ensure that the strip chart recorder is loaded with a paper roll.

4.25A.11 Perform the print test given in Section 2 and verify that the recorder is
working properly.

Rev. K
4-77A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

REAR VIEW OF STRIP CHART


RECORDER ASSEMBLY

IN-LINE POWER
CONNECTOR

SV00429

DISPLAY
CONTROL
PCB

VITALBUS CONNECTOR

Figure 4-25A. Strip Chart Recorder Assembly

Rev. H
4-77B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.26 Flow Sensor

The flow (respiratory volume) sensor is installed on an adapter at the expiratory


valve on the breathing system. The arrangement is shown in Figure 4-26.
along with its connection to the sensor interface panel on the machine.

NOTE: The electronics housing is not field servicable. If this component fails,
the complete flow sensor assembly must be replaced.

4.26.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.26.2 Disconnect the sensor plug from its receptacle on the sensor interface
panel.

4.26.3 Disconnect the 22 mm breathing hose from the sensor.

4.26.4 Loosen the retaining ring on the adapter and remove the flow sensor.

4.26.5 Press down on the black lever under the flow housing and pull the flow
housing and transducer assembly out of the electronic housing.

4.26.6 Pull both transducers out of the flow housing.

4.26.7 Rotate the replacement transducers while pressing them into their
ports on the flow housing. Ensure that the three O-rings on each
transducer are not damaged and re fully seated.

4.26.8 Slide the transducer/flow housing assembly into the electronic housing.
Refer to the diagram on the housing to determine direction.

NOTE: A “click” should be audible when the lever secures the flow housing
into the electronic housing. If the flow housing does not fit properly,
make sure the pin on the electronic housing is properly aligned with
the hole in the flow housing. If the pin is properly aligned, try shifting
the flow housing from side to side until the transducers and housing fit
properly in place.

4.26.9 Align the tab on the mounting adapter with the corresponding slot and
attach the threaded port on the flow sensor to the goose neck adapter.
Tighten the retaining ring (hand tighten only).

4.26.10 Plug the sensor cord into the volume connector on the sensor interface
panel.

4.26.11 Reconnect the 22 mm breathing hose to the flow sensor.

4.26.12 Perform the power-up self test (6.18.3) and respiratory volume test
(6.19) given in Section 6.

4-78 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

GOOSE NECK
MOUNTING ADAPTER

FLOW
SENSOR

SENSOR
INTERFACE
PANEL

RETAINING
RING

SENSOR CORD SV00189

Figure 4-26. Flow Sensor

Rev. K
4-79
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.27 Oxygen Sensor

The oxygen sensor is plugged into the top of the inspiratory valve during
machine operation. The arrangement of the sensor capsule and its housing, and
also its connection to the sensor interface panel is shown in Figure 4-27.

4.27.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.27.2 Pull the oxygen sensor housing from the inspiratory valve dome. (It is a
press fit.)

4.27.3 Unscrew the cover from the sensor housing and remove the sensor
capsule.

4.27.4 Remove the replacement sensor capsule from its shipping container
and install it in the housing. Ensure that the copper rings on the
capsule mate with the electrical contacts in the sensor housing.

4.27.5 Wait 15 minutes for the sensor capsule to stabilize.

4.27.6 Turn the System Power switch to ON and perform the 21% calibration
procedure for the oxygen monitor given in Section 5.

NOTE: When the machine is not in use, the oxygen sensor is removed from the
inspiratory valve dome, and the valve dome is plugged.

4-80
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SENSOR CORD OXYGEN SENSOR HOUSING

SENSOR CAPSULE

INSPIRATORY VALVE SENSOR HOUSING COVER

INSPIRATORY
VALVE PLUG

SENSOR
INTERFACE
PANEL

SV00188

Figure 4-27. Oxygen Sensor Replacement

4-81
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.28 Lower Frame Cover (skirt) Replacement

4.28.1 Remove any unsecured equipment and accessories from the machine.

4.28.2 Remove the twelve cap screws securing the bottom of the skirt to the
frame.

4.28.3 Remove the right side (facing the front of the machine) cover panel by
removing the six screws at the back of the machine and the two at the
front edge by the monitor display.

4.28.4 Remove the rear cover panel behind the pipeline inlets.

4.28.5 Disconnect the copper tube from the bottom of the suction pilot valve.

4.28.6 Remove the left side (facing the front of the machine) cover panel by
removing the three screws at the back of the machine.

4.28.7 Remove the screws securing the skirt to the left and right standoffs
near the rear casters.

4.28.8 Remove the drawer. Remove the two button head screws from the left
and right front inside corners of the drawer housing.

4.28.9 Remove the two hex nuts at the rear of the drawer housing, and
remove the housing.

4.28.10 Remove the three cap screws from the O2 flush pole at the bulkhead
connection.

4.28.11 Remove the button head screw at the bottom of the O2 flush pole.

4.28.12 Loosen all screws securing the front blue shroud to the Divan
ventilator and remove the two outer screws.

4.28.13 Swing the front shroud out and to the left.

4.28.14 Loosen the two button head screws securing the O2 flush cover, and
remove the cover.

4.28.15 Note the location of the tubing attached to the O2 flush valve, and
disconnect each hose.

4.28.16 Lift up the O2 flush pole, and pull the tubing out of the pole.

4.28.17 Carefully pull the skirt forward; you will need to spread the sides of the
skirt slightly apart in order to clear the machine as it is being removed
from the machine.

4-82 Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.28.18 Install the replacement skirt on the machine.

4.28.19 Slide the O2 flush tubing into the flush pole, and reconnect the tube
with two O2 labels to the lower valve fitting, and the tube with a single
O2 label to the upper valve fitting (reinstallation should not require
the use of a ‘fish’). Reinstall the O2 flush cover.

4.28.20 Place the O2 flush pole into the frame socket and secure it with the
button head screw previously removed.

4.28.21 Reattach the front shroud to the Divan control panel.

4.28.22 Reinstall the three screws previously removed from the O2 flush pole
bulkhead.

4.28.23 Reinstall the drawer housing and secure the assembly with the
hardware previously removed. Reinstall the drawer.

4.28.24 Reinstall the screws at the left and right side standoffs near the rear
casters.

4.28.25 Install the left side lower cover panel using the hardware previously
removed.

CAUTION: To prevent component damage, be careful when aligning the copper


tube to the vacuum pilot valve.

4.28.26 Reconnect the copper tube to the bottom port of the vacuum pilot valve.

4.28.27 Reinstall the right side cover panel with the screws previously
removed.

4.28.28 Reinstall the cover panel behind the pipeline inlets.

4.28.29 Reinstall the cap screws along the bottom of the skirt to the frame.

4.28.30 Reinstall any unsecured equipment and accessories that were


previously removed from the machine.

4.28.31 Reconnect the oxygen pipeline hose.

4.28.32 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. K
4-83
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.29 Divan Safety Plate Replacement

The safety plate is part of the piston coupling assembly and is located in the
motor drive assembly. The Divan ventilator assembly must be removed from the
machine for access to the piston coupling assembly. Following are the steps
needed to replace the safety plate should it become damaged.

4.29.1 Remove the Divan ventilator assembly from the NM6000. Refer to
Paragraph 4.16.

4.29.2 Remove the two screws securing the Divan cover weld assembly, and
slide the cover back to remove it. See Figure 4-28.

COVER
SCREWS (2X)

COVER WELD
ASSEMBLY

DIVAN
VENTILATOR

SV00245

Figure 4-28. Divan Cover Removal

Rev. E
4-84
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.29.3 Manually move the piston coupling assembly back to obtain access to
it.

4.29.4 Remove the two safety plate mounting screws, and remove the
damaged safety plate. See Figure 4-29.

4.29.5 Install the replacement safety plate:


--Apply a small amount of Loctite #222 to the screw threads.
--Orient the safety plate as shown in the illustration, and as far
forward as possible.
--Tighten the safety plate mounting screws securely.

4.29.6 Verify that there is clearance between the safety plate and the “U”
shaped lever.

4.29.7 Ensure that the “U” shaped lever is in its up position and return the
piston coupling assembly to its full forward position. Install and latch a
piston-cylinder unit into the ventilator. Verify that the relieved area of
the safety plate does not interfere with piston bolt as the drive belt
shafts are rotated to move the piston coupling assembly back and forth.

4.29.8 Reinstall the Divan cover weld assembly.

4.29.9 Reinstall the Divan into the NM6000.

4.29.10 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. E
4-85
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

TOP VIEW OF MOTOR DRIVE UNIT

PISTON BOLT
(SHOWN IN
LATCHED POSITION)

PISTON
DRIVE BELTS CYLINDER
UNIT

PISTON
COUPLING
ASSEMBLY

SAFETY PLATE

SAFETY PLATE

SAFETY PLATE MOUNTING SCREWS (2X)

SV00426

'U' SHAPED LEVER


(SHOWN IN LATCHED POSITION)

Figure 4-29. Safety Plate Replacement

4-86 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.30 WPU Mother Board Battery Replacement

The battery is internal to the processor assembly located in the lower part of the
machine, below the ventilator. Access to the processor’s battery requires
removal of the lower left back panel, disconnecting the power supply cables, and
removal of the processor cover. The battery orientation is shown in Figure 4-30.

4.30.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.30.2 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to the
‘out’ position.

WARNING: Before servicing, ensure that AC power is removed from the


machine and all circuit breakers are disengaged (pulled out). Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by electrical shock.

CAUTION: Before servicing, ensure that all circuit breakers are disengaged
(pulled out). Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to
electrical components.

4.30.3 Close all cylinder valves and remove the cylinders from their yokes.

4.30.4 Remove the Vitalbus Hub mounting hardware (do not disassemble the
hinge hardware). Remove the power cord strain relief retainer and
swing open the assembly.

4.30.5 Remove the left back panel mounting hardware, and remove the panel
from the machine.

4.30.6 Disconnect all cables from the power supply. Place a sheet of paper over
the power supply cable connection opening to reduce the possibility of
hardware falling into the power supply box.

4.30.7 Remove the screws securing the processor cover.

4.30.8 Locate the 3 volt lithium battery (P/N 4116144) on the processor
mother board. Note its orientation (see illustration) and remove the
battery.

4.30.9 Insert the battery and ensure that it is properly seated into its socket.

4.30.10 Reinstall the processor cover.

4.30.11 Remove the paper from the power supply and reattach all cables to
their original locations.

4.30.12 Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

Rev. E 4-87
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

intel

LITHIUM
BATTERY

MOTHER BOARD PCB ASM

Figure 4-30. WPU Lithium Battery Location

4.30.13 Swing the Vitalbus Hub door closed. Reattach the power cord strain
relief retainer and reinstall the previously removed hardware.

4.30.14 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch
diameter loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus
HUB door using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord
socket as shown in Figure 4-30A.

4-88 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 4-30A. Power Cord Routing

4.30.15 Attach the cylinders to the yokes.

4.30.16 Enable all circuit breakers and reconnect AC power to the machine.

Rev. K 4-89
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

166 and 233 MHz WPU Bios Testing:

NOTE: If you have a 700 MHz WPU, skip to Step 4.30.24.

4.30.17 With the System Power switch at STANDBY, connect a keyboard to the
DIN connector on the underside of the NM6000 cockpit as shown in
Figure 4-30B.

SV00397

Figure 4-30B. Keyboard Connection

4.30.18 Press and hold F1 on the keyboard and turn the System Power switch
to ON. Release the F1 key when the BIOS screen appears.

4.30.19 Using the arrow keys to navigate, select Load default BIOS settings,
and press the Enter key to save.

4.30.20 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.30.21 Press and hold F1 on the keyboard and turn the System Power switch
to ON. Verify the following data, change settings as needed:

MAIN
System Date: <current date>
System Time: <current time>
Floppy Options: <press enter>
Floppy A: Disabled
Floppy B: Disabled
Floppy Access: Read/Write
Press esc to return

Primary IDE Master: (various brands/types) <press enter>


IDE Device Config.: Auto Config.
IDE Translation Mode: Auto detected
Multiple Sector Setting: Auto detected
Fast Programmed I/O Auto detected
Press esc to return

4-90 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

Primary IDE Slave: CD-ROM <press enter>


IDE Config: Auto Config
IDE Translation Mode: Auto detected
Multiple Sector Setting: Auto detected
Fast Programmed I/O: Auto detected
Press esc to return

Secondary IDE Master: Not installed <press enter>


IDE Config: Disabled
IDE Translation Mode: Auto detected
Multiple Sector Setting: Auto detected
Fast Programmed I/O: Auto detected
Press esc to return

Secondary IDE Slave: Not installed <press enter>


IDE Config: Disabled
IDE Translation Mode: Auto detected
Multiple Sector Setting: Auto detected
Fast Programmed I/O: Auto detected
Press esc to return

Boot Options: <press enter>


Second Boot Device: Hard Disk
Third Boot Device: Disabled
Fourth Boot Device: Disabled
System Cache: Enabled
Boot Speed Turbo
Num Lock: Off
Setup Prompt: Enabled
Hard Disk Pre-Delay: Disabled
Typematic Rate Programming Default
Press esc to return, arrow➜ to advance

ADVANCED
Peripheral Configuration <press enter>
Pri. PCI IDE Int.: Auto configured
Sec. PCI IDE Int.: Disabled
Floppy Interface: Auto configured
Ser. Port1 Int.: COM1 3f8 IRQ4
Ser. Port2 Int.: COM2 2f8 IRQ3
Port 2 IR Mode: Disabled
Parallel Port Int.: LPT1 378 IRQ7
Parallel Port Type: Compatible
USB Interface Disabled
Press esc to return

Audio Configuration: <press enter>


Audio Config. Mode: Manual
SB Port Base: 220h
WSS Port Base: 530h
MPU Port Base: 330h
WSS Int.: IRQ11
SB/MPU: IRQ5
WSS Play DMA: Channel 0
SB Play/WSS DMA: Channel 1

Rev. M 4-91
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Game Port: Disabled


Press esc to return
disregard (Game Port Status Disabled)
disregard (FM Synthesizer Port Status 388)

Advanced Chipset Config: <press enter>


Base Memory: 640KB
ISA LFB Size: Disabled
Video Pallet Snoop: Disabled
Latency Timer: 64
disregard (Bank 0 Fast Page DRAM)
disregard (Bank 1 Fast Page DRAM)
Onboard Video IRQ Disabled
Press esc to return

Power Management Config.: <press enter>


Adv. Pwr. Mgmt.: Enabled
IDE Drv. Pwr. Dwn.: Enabled
VESA Video Pwr. Dwn.: Disabled
Inactivity Timer: 10
Hot Key (ctrl-alt) Z
Press esc to return

Plug and Play Configuration: <press enter>


Config. Mode: Use BIOS Setup
ISA Shared Memory Size: Disabled
IRQ9 Used by ISA card
IRQ10 Available
IRQ15 Used by ISA card
Press esc to return

NOTE: DO NOT enter SECURITY setting.

4.30.22 Select <F10> then Enter to save and exit the system BIOS.

4.30.23 Enter the Setup menu and verify that time and date settings are
correct.

Enter The Service menu and verify that next PM due date is correct.

4-92 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

700 MHz WPU BIOS Testing:

4.30.24 With the System Power switch at STANDBY, connect a keyboard to the
DIN connector on the underside of the NM6000 cockpit as shown in
Figure 4-30B

4.30.25 Press and hold <DEL> on the keyboard and turn the System Power
switch to ON. Release the <DEL> key when the BIOS screen appears.

Setup the system BIOS as follows:

Standard CMOS Setup


System Date: <current date>
System Time: <current time>
Primary IDE Master: Auto
Primary IDE slave: None
Secondary IDE Master: None
Secondary IDE Slave: None
Drive A: None
Drive B: None
Video: EGA/VGA
Halt On: All, But Keyboard

BIOS Features Setup


Virus Warning: Disabled
CPU L1 Cache: Enabled
CPU L2 Cache: Enabled
CPU L2 Cache ECC Checking: Enabled
Quick Power on Self Test: Disabled
Boot Sequence: C Only
Swap Floppy Drive: Disabled
Boot Up Floppy Seek: Disabled
Boot Up Num Lock Status: Off
Typematic Rate Setting: Disabled
Typematic Rate (Char/Sec): 6
Typematic Delay (mSec): 250
Security Option: Setup
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop: Disabled
OS Select of DRAM>64 Mbytes: Non-OS2
HDD S.M.A.R.T. Capability: Enabled
Processor Serial Number Disabled

Chip Set Features Setup


SDRAM RAS to CAS Delay: 3
SDRAM RAS to CAS Delay: 3
SDRAM RAS to CAS Delay: 3
SDRAM Pre-charge Control: Disabled
DRAM Data Integrity Mode: ECC
System BIOS Cacheable: Enabled
Video BIOS Shadow: Disabled
Video RAM Cacheable: Disabled
8 Bit I/O Recovery Time: 3
16 Bit I/O Recovery Time: 2
Memory Hole at 15M to 16M: Disabled
PCI 2.1 Compliance: Enabled
AGP Grapics Aperture 64 MB

Rev. K 4-93
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

CPU/PCI Clock (MHz): Default


Spread Spectrum: Disabled

Power Management Setup


ACPI Function Disabled
Power Management: Disabled
PM Controlled by APM: No
Video Off Method: DPMS
Video Off After: Suspend
Modem Use IRQ: NA
Standby Mode: Disabled
Suspend Mode: Disabled
HDD Power down: Diaabled
VGA Active Monitor: Disabled
Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Instant-Off
PWR Lost Resume State: Turn On
Resume on Ring: Disabled
Resume on LAN: Disabled
Resume on Alarm: Disabled

PCI/Plug and Play Setup


Resuorces Controlled By: Manual
Reset Configuration Data: Disabled
IRQ-3 Assigned to: Legacy ISA
IRQ-4 Assigned to: Legacy ISA
IRQ-5 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
IRQ-7 Assigned to: Legacy ISA
IRQ-9 Assigned to: Legacy ISA
IRQ-10 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
IRQ-11 Assigned to: Legacy ISA
IRQ-12 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
IRQ-14 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
IRQ-15 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-0 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-1 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-3 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-5 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-6 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
DMA-7 Assigned to: PCI/ISA PnP
Assign IRQ for VGA: No
Assign IRQ to USB: No
PCI Slot 1 Use IRQ: Auto
PCI Slot 2 Use IRQ: 5
PCI Slot 3 Use IRQ: Auto
PCI Slot 4 Use IRQ: 10
Used MEM Base Address: N/A

Integrated Peripherals
IDE HDD Block Mode: Enabled
IDE Primary Master PIO: Auto
IDE Primary Slave: Auto
IDE Primary Master UDMA: Auto
IDE Primary Slave UDMA: Auto
IDE Secondary Master UDMA Auto
IDE Secondary Slave UDMA: Auto
On-Chip Primary PCI IDE: Enabled
On-Chip Secnodary PCI IDE: Disabled
USB Keyboard Support: Disabled

4-94 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

Init Display on First: PCI


KBC Input Clock: 8 MHz
Onboard FDC Controller: Enabled
Onboard Serial Port1: 3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port1: 2F8/IRQ3
UART 2 Mode: Normal
Onboard Parallel Port: 378/IRQ7
Parallel Port Mode: SPP
Keyboard/Mouse Power On: Disabled

4.30.26 Select <F10> to save and exit the system BIOS.

4.30.27 Select <Enter> to reboot the system.

4.30.28 Select <Enter> when prompted for the date and time.

4.30.29 Disconnect the keyboard.

4.30.30 Enter the Setup menu and verify that time and date settings are
correct.

4.30.31 Enter the Service menu and verify that next PM due date is correct.

Rev. K 4-95
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.31 Vaporizer Mounting and Exclusion System

Figure 4-31 shows the tubing and connection arrangement at the back of the
vaporizer mounting and exclusion system manifold.

4.31.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY. Disconnect the AC power
cord and disable the circuit breakers.

4.31.2 Remove all vaporizers from the mounting and exclusion assembly.

4.31.3 On the left (facing the front of the machine) side of the cockpit area,
remove the upper blind plate or Integrated Patient Monitoring Module
if applicable.

4.31.4 Disconnect the two copper tubes at the back of the vaporizer mounting
and exclusion system manifold.

4.31.5 Remove the two brass fittings from the assembly and discard the
existing copper washer. Clean the residual Loctite from the threads of
the fittings.

4.31.6 While supporting the vaporizer and exclusion assembly at the front,
remove the large jam nuts and lockwashers and slide the assembly
forward to remove it from the machine.

4.31.7 Install the replacement assembly using the hardware previously


removed. Before tightening the hardware make certain the assembly is
level and flush with the cockpit panel.

4.31.8 Apply a minimal amount of Loctite #222 (purple) to the pipe threads of
the larger fitting and install it into the vaporizer mounting and
exclusion system port at the inboard location.

4.31.9 Slip a new copper washer (P/N 4110792-093) onto the other brass
fitting and install it into the outside vaporizer mounting and exclusion
system port.

4.31.10 Reconnect the two copper tubes to the brass fittings.

4.31.11 Lubricate the vaporizer mounting and exclusion system slider bar with
Molykote P/N 4115127.

4.31.12 Reinstall and secure the blind plate, or reinstall the Integrated Patient
Monitoring Module if applicable.

4.31.13 Reinstall all vaporizers that were previously removed. If the machine
has a D-Tec Desflurane vaporizer, refer to SP00189. Refer to the Setup
and Installation manual for all other model vaporizers.

4-96 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.31.14 Reconnect the AC power cord and enable the circuit breakers.

4.31.15 Perform a Fresh Gas Leak test and Vaporizer Exclusion and alignment
checks. Refer to Section 7.1 for modifications and adjustments.

4.31.16 Perform a PMC on the Integrated Patient Monitoring Module if


applicable.

SLIDER BAR

SV00442

COPPER WASHER
(THIS SIDE ONLY)

LOCK WASHER

JAM NUT

STRAIGHT FITTING

Figure 4-31. Vaporizer Mounting and Exclusion System Assembly

Rev. K 4-97
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.32 Main Pneumatic Valve Replacement Procedure

The main pneumatic valve is threaded into the system power switch housing,
Access to this assembly and its tubing connections requires removal of the
bottom plate below thw System Power switch.

4.32.1 Disconnect the oxygen pipeline hose.

4.32.2 Close the oxygen cylinder valve and press the O2 Flush to depressurize
the oxygen circuit.

4.32.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.

4.32.4 Pull the circuit breakers to their ‘out’ position.

4.32.5 Remove the cockpit bottom plate.

4.32.6 Locate the main pneumatic switch. Using a wrench at the base of the
compression fittings to support the valve, disconnect the copper tube
ferrules.

4.32.7 Remove the valve assembly from the housing by rotating it counter-
clockwise.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.32.8 Apply Loctite #271 (red) to the threads of brass fitting P/N 4109408
and P/N 4109410, and install them into replacement valve P/N
4103588 in the same orientation as the original.

CAUTION: When assembling the elbow fitting so not apply torque to the valve
body and the fittings; you must torque between the hex nut and the fitting to
prevent damage to the valve.

4.32.9 Thread the locking nut onto the valve body but do not tighten it.

4.32.10 Thread the replacement valve into the housing but do not tighten it.

4.32.11 Attempt to turn the main switch to the ON position, then rotate the
valve counter-clockwise one revolution until the switch can be turned
to the ON position without binding at the top of the cam lobe.

4.32.12 Align the assembly’s valve ports to the copper tubes. Do not rotate the
assembly clockwise or more than one revolution.

4.32.13 Using a rocking motion, secure the assembly to the housing with the
locknut. With a wrench at the base of the compression fittings to
suppoort the valve, reconnect the copper tube ferrules.

4-98 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.32.14 Restore AC power to the machine and reset the circuit breakers.

4.32.15 Reconnect the oxygen pipeline hose.

4.32.16 Perform an oxygen pipeline leak test.

4.32.17 Turn the System Power switch to ON, and verify the switch does not
bind. Allow the machine to complete its self-diagnostic tests.

4.32.18 Set the ventilator to Volume mode ventilation, adjust the oxygen fresh
gas flow to 10 L/min. Press the Oxygen Flush and verify the O2
SUPPLY LOW alarm does not activate.

4.32.19 Close all flow control valves and set the ventilator to Standby. Turn the
System Power switch to STANDBY and verify the system electronics
turn off.

4.32.20 Reinstall the cockpit bottom plate.

4.32.21 Perform the PMC procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. K 4-99
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.33 Divan Ventilator Front Bezel and Related Components Replacement

This procedure includes instructions for the replacement and testing of the
following Narkomed 6000 Divan front bezel components:
--Divan Front Bezel Assembly P/N AF00468 and SEAF00468
--Divan Front Bezel Encoder P/N 8200957
--Divan Front Bezel Display PCB P/N 8202101
--Divan Front Panel LED & Bargraph P/N 8201090 and Alphanumeric display
P/N 1827456

Divan Front Bezel Assembly Replacement Procedure:

4.33.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.33.2 Disconnect AC Power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components

4.33.3 Remove the front bumper from the ventilator chassis by removing the
five screws on the underside of the front bumper; one screw at the right
side rail; three screws securing the left side of the bumper to the bag
pole, in order to swing the bumper away from the ventilator. See
Figure 4-32.

4.33.4 Remove the three screws holding the front bar (these screws also
retain the front display bezel of the ventilator). Set the bar aside and
carefully pull the front display bezel downward; carefully disconnect its
ribbon cable from the motherboard.

4.33.5 Record the removed panel S/N located at the lower right corner of the
bezel PCB.

4.33.6 Record the S/N of the replacement panel. Set the display bezel in place
and reconnect its data cable to the motherboard. While holding the
bezel in place, reattach the front bar with the three screws that were
previously removed.

4.33.7 Reinstall the front bumper.

4.33.8 Restore AC power and enable the circuit breakers.

4.33.9 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify all front panel Leds
illuminate, then verify the ventilator successfully completes its self-
test routine.

4-100 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY

FRONT
BAR

BAR
SCREWS
(3X)

BUMPER
RIBBON
CABLE

BUMPER
SP21301
SCREWS (5X)

Figure 4-32. Divan Front Bezel Assembly

Divan Front Bezel Encoder Replacement Procedure:

4.33.10 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.33.11 Disconnect AC Power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components

4.33.12 Remove the front bumper from the ventilator chassis by removing the
five screws on the underside of the front bumper; one screw at the right
side rail; three screws securing the left side of the bumper to the bag
pole, in order to swing the bumper away from the ventilator. See
Figure 4-32.

Rev. L 4-101
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.33.13 Remove the three screws holding the front bar (these screws also
retain the front display bezel of the ventilator). Set the bar aside and
carefully pull the front display bezel downward; carefully disconnect its
ribbon cable from the motherboard.

4.33.14 Pull the encoder knob off the shaft and remove the retaining nut
securing the encoder assembly to the panel. Record its two-digit
engraved date code. See Figure 4-33.

4.33.15 Carefully disconnect the translucent data cables and encoder wire
harness from the PCB.

4.33.16 Remove the eight screws around the PCB perimeter securing it to the
panel chassis.

4.33.17 Record the two-digit date code (see Figure 4-33) on the replacement
encoder. Apply a small amount of purple Loctite (222) to the threads of
the encoder. Align the notch on the encoder to the socket on the panel
and reinstall the panel nut. Reattach the encoder knob.

CAUTION: Do Not allow Loctite to migrate into the encoder’s moving parts.

4.33.18 Reconnect the data cables to the PCB. Connect the encoder wire
harness to the PCB. The green wire on the five-pin connector attaches
to Pin 1 on the PCB as identified by a white marking. The blue wire on
the two-pin connector attaches to Pin one on the PCB as identified by a
white marking. See Figure 4-34.

CAUTION: These wire harnesses are not keyed. Be certain they are attached in
the proper orientation as noted in the above step.

4.33.19 Reinstall the eight screws to secure the PCB to the panel chassis.
Apply a small amount of Red Insulating Varnish between the screws
and the PCB.

CAUTION: Do Not over-torque the mounting screws.

4.33.20 Set the display bezel in place and reconnect its data cable to the
motherboard. While holding the bezel in place, reattach the front bar
with the three screws that were previously removed.

4.33.21 Reinstall the front bumper.

4.33.22 Restore AC power and enable the circuit breakers.

4.33.23 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify the ventilator
successfully completes its self-test routine. Verify the encoder
increments and confirms selections properly.

4-102 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

DATE CODE LOCATION

PIN 1

Figure 4-33. Encoder Date Code and Pin 1 Locations

PIN 1

Figure 4-34. Divan Front Panel PCB - Pin 1 Location

Rev. L 4-103
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Divan Front Bezel Display PCB Replacement Procedure:

4.33.24 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.33.25 Disconnect AC Power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components

4.33.26 Remove the front bumper from the ventilator chassis by removing the
five screws on the underside of the front bumper; one screw at the right
side rail; three screws securing the left side of the bumper to the bag
pole, in order to swing the bumper away from the ventilator. See
Figure 4-32.

4.33.27 Remove the three screws holding the front bar (these screws also
retain the front display bezel of the ventilator). Set the bar aside and
carefully pull the front display bezel downward; carefully disconnect its
ribbon cable from the motherboard.

4.33.28 Record the serial number located at the lower right corner of the
original and the replacement PCB assemblies.

4.33.29 Remove the eight screws around the PCB perimeter securing it to the
panel chassis. Remove the bracket securing the data cable to the ferrite
blocks.

4.33.30 Carefully disconnect the translucent data cables and encoder wire
harnesses from the PCB, then remove the assembly.

4.33.31 Install the replacement PCB - reconnect the data cables and encoder
wire harness to the PCB. The green wire on the five-pin connector
attaches to Pin 1 on the PCB as identified by a white marking. The
blue wire on the two-pin connector attaches to Pin one on the PCB as
identified by a white marking. Refer to Figure 4-33 and Figure 4-34.

CAUTION: These wire harnesses are not keyed. Be certain they are attached in
the proper orientation as noted in the above step.

4.33.32 Reinstall the eight screws to secure the PCB to the panel chassis.
Reattach the bracket securing the data cable to the ferrite blocks.
Apply a small amount of Red Insulating Varnish between the screws
and the PCB or ferrite mounting bracket.

CAUTION: Do Not over-torque the mounting screws.

4-104 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.33.33 Set the display bezel in place and reconnect its data cable to the
motherboard. While holding the bezel in place, reattach the front bar
with the three screws that were previously removed.

4.33.34 Reinstall the front bumper.

4.33.35 Restore AC power and enable the circuit breakers.

4.33.36 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify all front panel Leds
illuminate, then verify the ventilator successfully completes its self-
test routine.

Divan Front Panel LED & Bargraph and Alphanumeric Display Replacement
Procedure:

4.33.37 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.33.38 Disconnect AC Power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling any of the Divan electronics
assemblies. These boards contain static sensitive components

4.33.39 Remove the front bumper from the ventilator chassis by removing the
five screws on the underside of the front bumper; one screw at the right
side rail; three screws securing the left side of the bumper to the bag
pole, in order to swing the bumper away from the ventilator. See
Figure 4-32.

4.33.40 Remove the three screws holding the front bar (these screws also
retain the front display bezel of the ventilator). Set the bar aside and
carefully pull the front display bezel downward; carefully disconnect its
ribbon cable from the motherboard.

4.33.41 Remove the eight screws around the PCB perimeter securing it to the
panel chassis. If replacing the Bargraph/LED display you must also
remove the two remaining screws.

4.33.42 Carefully disconnect the translucent data cables and wire harnesses
from the PCB, then remove the assembly.

4.33.43 Skip the next three steps if you are replacing the Bargraph/LED
display.

4.33.44 Locate the alphanumeric display that is being replaced. Note its
orientation and carefully remove it by firmly supporting the daughter
board PCB and carefully pulling it straight out of its socket. See Figure
4-35.

Rev. L 4-105
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Figure 4-35. Alphanumeric Display

4.33.45 Align the pins on the replacement display with the corresponding
sockets on the daughter board and carefully install the replacement
display. Verify all pins engage and the LEDs are completely seated.

NOTE: The corner cut out on the display must point towards the word ‘DIVAN’
on the daughter board PCB.

4.33.46 Skip the next two steps.

4.33.47 Locate the Bargraph and LED display that is being replaced. Note its
orientation and carefully remove it by firmly supporting the PCB and
carefully pulling it straight out of its socket. See Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36. Bargraph Display

4-106 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

4.33.48 Align the pins on the replacement LED PCB with the corresponding
sockets on the motherboard and carefully install the PCB. Verify all
pins engage and the display is completely seated.

4.33.49 Reinstall the PCB and reconnect the data cables and encoder wire
harness to the PCB. The green wire on the five-pin connector attaches
to Pin 1 on the PCB as identified by a white marking. The blue wire on
the two-pin connector attaches to Pin one on the PCB as identified by a
white marking. Refer to Figure 4-33 and Figure 4-34.

CAUTION: These wire harnesses are not keyed. Be certain they are attached in
the proper orientation as noted in the above step.

4.33.50 Reinstall the eight screws to secure the PCB to the panel chassis.
Reattach the bracket securing the data cable to the ferrite blocks.
Apply a small amount of Red Insulating Varnish between the screws
and the PCB or ferrite mounting bracket.

CAUTION: Do Not over-torque the mounting screws.

4.33.51 Set the display bezel in place and reconnect its data cable to the
motherboard. While holding the bezel in place, reattach the front bar
with the three screws that were previously removed.

4.33.52 Reinstall the front bumper.

4.33.53 Restore AC power and enable the circuit breakers.

4.33.54 Turn the System Power switch to ON and verify all front panel Leds
illuminate, then verify the ventilator successfully completes its self-
test routine.

Rev. L 4-107
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

4.34 Integrated Patient Monitor (IPM) Replacement Procedure

The Integrated Patient Monitor asembly is contained in a replaceable module


that slides into an opening in the left (facing the front of the machine) side of the
machine. Access to connections at the back of the pod require removal of the
flowmeter housing back cover. The genral arrangement is shown in Figure 4-37.

CAUTION: All IPM pods are shipped from DMI with the current version
software and mechanical modifications. If the IPM’s original part number is
4113465-001, then 2.06 upgrade kit P/N 4117240 and IPM Operator’s Manual
P/N 4116574-002 must be installed to ensure proper system performance. If the
original IPM part number can not be determined, use the Narkomed 6000
system software to determine if the upgrade is required. All units with software
version < 2.06 require these updates.

4.34.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

4.34.2 Remove AC power from the machine and pull all circuit breakers to
their ‘out’ position.

4.34.3 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the IPM module and carefully
remove the assembly from the machine.

4.34.4 While supporting the IPM, disconnect the Vitalbus cable.

4.34.5 Record the serial number of the removed IPM on the report.

4.34.6 Record the serial number of the replacement IPM on the report.
Update the new part number and serial number in the Narkomed
6000’s Service Parts notebook at the completion of this procedure.

4.34.7 Reconnect the Vitalbus cable to the replacement IPM.

4.34.8 Slide the IPM into the machine and secure it with its captive screw.

4.34.9 Restore AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers.

4.34.10 Perform the IPM test procedure given in Section 6A of this manual.

4-108 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)

IPM

SV00466

VITALBUS CABLE

Figure 4-37. Integrated Patient Monitor Replacement

Rev. L 4-109
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

5.0 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

Equipment required:

• Test pressure gauge for setting cylinder pressure regulators


• Oxygen monitor for adjusting Oxygen Ratio Controller
• Test flowmeter for setting ventilator oxygen supply flow rate
• Digital pressure manometer for setting ventilator supply pressure
• Test flowmeter for setting gas analyzer sample flow rate
• Keyboard for performing advanced touch screen calibration

Rev. K 5-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.1 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment

5.1.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.1.2 Close all cylinder valves except one O2 valve.

5.1.3 Set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

5.1.4 Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.

5.1.5 Close the O2 cylinder valve.

5.1.6 Close all of the flow control valves and press the O2 Flush valve to drain
oxygen pressure from the system.

5.1.7 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.1.8 Remove the cylinders from their yokes.

5.1.9 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

NOTE: Miminum cylinder pressure for this adjustment shall be:


N2O: 600 psi; O2, Air: 1000 psi.

5.1.10 Locate the test port in the regulator output line. The O2 test port is
located on the O2 manifold; the N2O or Air test port is located
downstream of the N2O or Air pipeline inlet check valve.

5.1.11 Remove the plug from the port and connect a test gauge (P/N S000063).

5.1.12 Reinstall and open an O2 cylinder (also reinstall the N2O or Air cylinder
if the N2O or Air regulator is being adjusted).

5.1.13 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.1.14 Set the O2 flow to 4 L/min. (also set the N2O or Air flow to 4 L/min. if
these regulators are being adjusted).

5.1.15 Remove the acorn nut from the regulator to expose the adjusting screw.
For N2O, turn the screw until the test gauge indicates 46 psi. (50 psi for
CSA machines). For O2 and Air, use the compensated regulator output
setting based on the cylinder pressure given in the following table.

CAUTION: Based on information supplied by the cylinder regulator


manufacturer, when the regulator is used for O2 or Air, its output pressure will
decrease 0.5 psi for every 100 psi increase in cylinder pressure above 1000 psi.
Currently, these pressure regulators are calibrated at 47 psi with a cylinder
supply of 1000 psi. If a 2000 psi cylinder is then installed, the regulator output
will be 42 psi. This change in output must be compensated for to provide
accurate performance throughout the cylinder’s working range.

5-2 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

NOTE: Cylinder pressure compensation for the N2O regulator is not required.

Compensated Regulator Compensated Regulator


Cylinder Pressure (psi)
output setting (psi) output tolerances (-4/+2)

2000 42 (*45) 38 - 44 (*41 - 47)


1800 43 (*46) 39 - 45 (*42 - 48)
1600 44 (*47) 40 - 46 (*43 - 49)
1400 45 (*48) 41 - 47 (*44 - 50)
1200 46 (*49) 42 - 48 (*45 - 51)
1000 47 (*50) 43 - 49 (*46 - 52)

* Canada settings

5.1.16 Verify the adjusted regulator maintains its compensated output


tolerance.

5.1.17 If the O2 cylinder regulator output was adjusted, perform the following
test:

5.1.17.1 Set the ventilator to Volume Mode ventilation.

5.1.17.2 Set the Auxiliary O2 and Fresh Gas O2 flows to 10 L/min.

5.1.17.3 Press the O2 Flush and verify the Lo O2 Supply alarm is not
active. If the alarm is active refer to Section 5.2: Oxygen Supply
Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment.

5.1.18 Reinstall the acorn nut on the regulator.

5.1.19 Close the cylinder valves and allow pressure to drain from the system.

5.1.20 Close the flow control valves and turn the System Power switch to
STANDBY.

5.1.21 Disconnect the test gauge from the test port and reinstall the plug.

5.1.22 Remove the cylinder(s) and reinstall the rear panel on the machine.

Rev. K 5-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SV00269

O2 REGULATOR

N2O REGULATOR

ACORN NUT ADJUSTING SCREW

Figure 5-1. Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment

5-4 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 5-1A. Power Cord Routing

5.1.23 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch diameter
loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus HUB door
using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord socket as shown
in Figure 5-1A.

5.1.24 Reinstall the cylinders in their yokes.

5.1.25 Perform a High Pressure Leak test on the adjusted regulator’s gas
circuit. Refer to Section 6.7.

5.1.26 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

5.1.27 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. K 5-4A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

This page intentionally left blank

5-4B Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

5.2 Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment

5.2.1 Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.

5.2.2 Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.

5.2.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.2.4 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

5.2.5 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

5.2.6 Locate the O2 pressure test port. Remove the plug from the port and
connect a test gauge.

5.2.7 Open an oxygen cylinder valve and turn the System Power switch to
ON.

5.2.8 Set the oxygen flow to 5 L/min.

5.2.9 Close the oxygen cylinder valve.

5.2.10 As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when the
pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown in the test gauge.

5.2.11 If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi or above 40 psi,
turn the adjustment wheel (see illustration), repeat the test and adjust
as necessary to bring the set point into the correct range.

5.2.12 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.2.13 Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the test port.

5.2.14 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original position,
and tighten its captive mounting screw.

5.2.15 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

5.2.16 Reconnect the pipeline hoses.

5.2.17 Perform the O2 leak test given in Section 6.7.3.

Rev. M 5-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE


ALARM SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT WHEEL

DECREASE SETPOINT

INCREASE SETPOINT

SV00138

Figure 5-2. Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch

5-6
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

5.3 Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment

5.3.1 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

5.3.2 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the gas analyzer pod and slide
the pod outward to gain better access to the flowmeter housing. Do the
same for any other pod projecting inside the flowmeter housing.

5.3.3 Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the fresh gas outlet.

5.3.4 Connect the pipeline hoses.

5.3.5 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.3.6 Set the O2 flow to 8 L/min.

5.3.7 Set the N2O flow to 8 L/min.

5.3.8 Set the O2 flow to 800 mL/min. for one minute. Verify that the O2
concentration is between 21% and 29% (N2O flow of 2.7 to 3.0 L/min.) If
needed, loosen the locknut on the ORC and turn the adjusting screw
(counter-clockwise to decrease N2O flow, clockwise to increase N2O flow)
to achieve a nominal O2 concentration of 25%.

5.3.9 Repeat the previous three steps until no further adjustment is needed.
tighten the locknut.

5.3.10 Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide flowmeter
indicates 8 L/min.

5.3.11 Verify that the O2 concentration is between 21% and 29% (O2 flow of 2.1
to 3.3 L/min.).

5.3.12 Slowly decrease the oxygen flow to 800 mL/min. The nitrous oxide flow
should decrease proportionally, and the O2 concentration should remain
between 21% and 29%.

5.3.13 Close the O2 flow control valve, and fully open the N2O flow control
valve. Verify that the O2 concentration is between 22% and 31%.

5.3.14 Close the N2O flow control valve and turn the System Power switch to
STANDBY.

5-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

ADJUSTING SCREW

LOCK NUT

SV00137

ORC

Figure 5-3. Oxygen Ratio Controller Adjustment

5-8
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

5.3.15 Return the gas analyzer pod (and any other pod) to its original position,
and tighten its captive mounting screw.

5.3.16 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

Rev. K 5-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.4 Oxygen Sensor Calibration

5.4.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.4.2 Enter the service mode (ref. Section 2) and touch the Service Monitors
softkey to display the service monitors notebook.

5.4.3 Touch the Oxygen tab to display the Oxygen Monitor Service Screen
page.

5.4.4 Zero Calibration:

5.4.4.1 Remove the oxygen sensor capsule from its housing and allow
the Current Cell A and Cell B readings to stabilize.

5.4.4.2 Touch the zero softkey to store the current values as the new
zero calibration.

5.4.4.3 Reinstall the sensor capsule in its housing.

5.4.5 21% Calibration:

5.4.5.1 Expose the sensor to ambient air only (away from any open part
of the breathing system) and allow it to stabilize for several
minutes.

5.4.5.2 Touch the Exit Service key, then touch the O2 Cal key to display
the Calibrate O2 dialog box.

5.4.5.3 Touch YES in the dialog box to initiate the 21% O2 calibration.

During calibration, the Oxygen numbox displays “CAL in


Progress.” Following successful calibration, the currently
sensed oxygen concentration appears in the Oxygen numbox.

5.4.5.4 When calibration is complete, install the sensor assembly in the


inspiratory valve dome.

NOTE: If the O2 sensor will not calibrate properly, refer to the Oxygen
Monitoring section of the Narkomed 6000 Operator’s Instruction
Manual for further information.
5.4.5.5 Test the performance of the Oxygen Analyzer. Refer to Section
6.11 Oxygen Analyzer.

5-10 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

OXYGEN SENSOR HOUSING

SENSOR HOUSING
COVER
SENSOR CAPSULE

INSPIRATORY VALVE

SV00282

Figure 5-4. Oxygen Sensor Calibration

¬ Zero ¯ 21%

Rev. F 5-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.5 Breathing Pressure Monitor Calibration

5.5.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.5.2 Enter the service mode (ref. Section 2) and touch the Service Monitors
softkey to display the service monitors notebook.

5.5.3 Touch the Pressure tab to display the Pressure Monitor Service Screen
page.

5.5.4 Zero Calibration:

5.5.4.1 Disconnect the breathing pressure sample line from the


breathing system and let the displayed Current Pressure Value
stabilize.

5.5.4.2 Touch the ZERO key to enter the new Stored Zero value.

5.5.5 Span Calibration:

5.5.5.1 Connect a test fixture to the breathing pressure sample line as


shown in Figure 5-5. Apply a pressure of 50 cm H2O.

5.5.5.2 When the displayed Current Pressure Value stabilizes, touch


the SPAN key to enter the new Stored Span value.

5.5.6 Disconnect the test fixture and reconnect the breathing pressure sample
line to the breathing system.

5.5.7 Touch the Exit Service key to return to the monitoring screen.

5.5.8 Test the performance of the pressure monitor. Refer to Section 6.20.

5-12 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

SV00281

SENSOR
INTERFACE
PANEL

TEST FIXTURE
4115049
PDM TO MONITOR ADAPTER

Figure 5-5. Pressure Monitor Calibration

5-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.6 Agent Monitor Sample Flow Calibration


NOTE: Agent monitor sample flow and line block calibrations are disabled in startup,
reduced accuracy, and ISO accuracy modes.
5.6.1 Install a fresh reservoir filter, semi-permeable tube, and the type of patient
sample line that will be utilized.
CAUTION: Variations of sample line length and internal diameter may affect sample
flow and line block calibrations. Calibration is required at initial set up with the end-
user-supplied sample line, and whenever a different type of sample line is used.
5.6.2 Remove the flowmeter housing back cover.

5.6.3 Disconnect the exhaust line at the back of the gas analyzer, and connect a test
flowmeter to the hose barb on the analyzer.

5.6.4 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.6.5 Enter the service mode (ref. Section 2) and touch the Service Monitors softkey
to display the service monitors notebook.

5.6.6 Touch the GAP tab to display the Flow Monitor Service Screen page.

5.6.7 Ensure that the flow monitor page displays the ACCURACY MODE: FULL
message.

5.6.8 Follow the instructions on the GAP page for setting the initial 250 mL/min.
flow rate with the variable restrictor. See Figure 5-6.

5.6.9 High Flow Calibration:

5.6.9.1 Touch the INCREASE FLOW or DECREASE FLOW key until the test
flowmeter indicates 200 mL/min.

5.6.9.2 Occlude the patient sample line. When the flow rate indicates zero on
the test flowmeter, touch the STORE HIGH key.

5.6.10 Low Flow Calibration:

5.6.10.1 Touch the DECREASE FLOW key until the test flowmeter indicates
100 mL/min.

5.6.10.2 Occlude the patient sample line. When the flow rate indicates zero on
the test flowmeter, touch the STORE LOW key.

5.6.11 Flow Calibration Verification:

5.6.11.1 Touch the CO2 numbox and verify the slider is at Min flow.

5.6.11.2 What is the sample flow rate? ___ mL/min. (75 - 125)

5.6.11.3 Adjust the slider bar to Max flow.

5.6.11.4 What is the sample flow rate? ___ mL/min. (175 - 225)

5-14 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

REAR VIEW OF
GAS ANALYZER POD

VITALBUS
EXHAUST LINE CONNECTION

VARIABLE GLYPTAL INSULATING


RESTRICTOR VARNISH

Figure 5-6. Sample Flow Calibration

5.6.11.5 Disconnect the test flowmeter and reconnect the exhaust line to
the gas analyzer.

5.6.12 Line Block Calibration Verification:

5.6.12.1 Connect a capnomed flowmeter test stand to the sample line,


using a Luer lock fitting and thread sealant in the port at the
top of the flowmeter.

5.6.12.2 Attach the hose at the lower port of the capnomed flowmeter
test stand to the hose barb on the auxiliary O2 flowmeter.

5.6.12.3 Turn the auxiliary O2 flowmeter flow control knob until the
capnomed flowmeter indicates 75 mL/min.

5.6.12.4 Verify that a CO2 LINE BLOCK message appears on the


monitor in approximately 15 seconds.

5.6.12.5 Remove the test equipment and close the auxiliary O2 flow
control valve.

5.6.12.6 Verify that the LINE BLOCK message has cleared.

5.6.13 Apply a small amount of Glyptal insulating varnish between the


variable restrictor screw and the chassis as shown in the illustration (do
not apply varnish to the screw slot).

5.6.14 Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.

Rev. E 5-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.7 CRT Alignment

5.7.1 Remove the upper back cover from the machine.

WARNING: When making CRT adjustments, use only non-metallic alignment


tools and be careful not to touch any of the high voltage leads or
CRT circuitry.

Figure 5-7. shows the locations of picture size, centering, and rotation
adjustments that can be made in the field if needed. These adjustments are
located along the top and back edge of the PC board on the left side (facing the
back of the CRT) of the chassis.

Contrast and brightness controls are accessible from the underside of the
mounting shelf.

NOTE: For adjusting horizontal size, use the control marked HB+ as shown in
the illustration. Do not use the control marked ‘Horizontal Size.’

NOTE: For horizontal centering, use the control marked Horizontal Phase as
shown in the illustration. Do not use the control marked ‘Horizontal
Centering.’

5.7.2 Reinstall the back cover when adjustments are completed.

5.7.3 Perform the Touch Screen calibration given in this section.

5-16
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

VERTICAL CENTERING

HB+
(USE FOR HORIZONTAL SIZE)

VERTICAL SIZE

HORIZONTAL PHASE
(USE FOR HORIZONTAL
CENTERING)

ROTATION

SV00047

Figure 5-7. CRT Adjustments

5-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.7A Flat Panel Display Brightness, Contrast and Phase adjustments


Note: These adjustments are neeeded whenever a display panel or WPU is replaced,
or whenever a CRT is replaced by a flat panel display. If it is necessary to readjust
the display for a change in ambient light, a complete calibration is needed, including
phase adjustment. This calibration should be performed at room ambient
temperature, with the temperature compensation phase adj on the display at 2 or
less.
5.7A.1 Remove the table lamp panel below the display, and pull it forward far
enough for access to the small PCB assembly attached to the back of this
panel. The control keys on this assembly are used for selecting display
functions, and for making the display adjustments. See Figure 5-7A.
5.7A.2 Press the FUNC key to bring up the On Screen Display (Figure 5-7B).
5.7A.3 Verify the width setting is 127.
Note: Do Not Adjust width - as it affects brightness, contrast and phase.
5.7A.4 Enter the service mode (ref. Section 2) and touch the Service Monitors
softkey to display the service monitors notebook. If the touch screen is
completely unresponsive, perform the Advanced Touch Screen
Calibration (refer to Paragh 5.8A).
5.7A.5 Touch the Screen tab to
display the Screen
Functions page as shown in
Figure 5-7C.
!

!
!

! FUNC
!

Figure 5-7A. OSD Control Keys

±n
z ¯
¯ "!
¯
¯

¯
¯ L MENU

PHASE ADJ -2
REMOVE OSD

1024 x 768

Figure 5-7B. On Screen Display Figure 5-7C. Screen Functions Page

5-17A Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

Brightness and Contrast Adjustments:

5.7A.6 Press the BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST button on the Screen Functions


page to display the gray-scale test pattern.

5.7A.7 Press the Function key (Figure 5-7A) to bring up the On Screen
Display (OSD) (Figure 5-7B).

5.7A.8 Use the key to select Brightness, then press the Function key.

5.7A.9 Press the key (repeatedly) to step the brightness scale to zero,
then press the Function key to enter that value.

5.7A.10 Use the key to select Contrast, then press the Function key.

5.7A.11 Use the or key to step the contrast scale to 32, then press the
Function key to enter that value.

NOTE: For the following adjustments, your angle of view should be


perpendicular to the center of the screen, and in normal ambient light.

5.7A.12 Select the Brightness function on the OSD, and press the Function key.

5.7A.13 Use the key to increase the brightness until the second and third
shaded bars in the lower left portion of the screen are barely
distinguishable. Press the Function key to enter that setting.

5.7A.14 Select the Contrast function on the OSD, and press the Function key.

5.7A.15 Increase the contrast until the brightest two shades in the lower right
portion of the screen are barely distinguishable from one another.

If necessary, return to the Brightness function and readjust brightness


until the two darkest shades in the lower half of the screen are barely
distinguishable. If you readjust brightness, contrast may need to be
adjusted again.

5.7A.16 When the desired settings are achieved, select Remove OSD and press
the Function key.

5.7A.17 Touch the NM6000 screen anywhere to return to the service monitors
notebook.

Rev. H 5-17B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

Phase Adjustment:

5.7A.18 Press the PHASE button on the Screen Functions page to display the
full screen text pattern.

NOTE: The following adjustment should be performed at normal room


temperature in order to provide a stable image over the range of
temperatures expected in normal use of the NM6000.
If the phase window is very small (0 - 5 counts), restore factory defaults
and repeat the adjustment procedure.

5.7A.19 Press the Function key to bring up the OSD.

NOTE: The following line of text is displayed on the OSD under the icons:
“Phase Adj ± # ”. This is a readout of the temperature compensation
circuit and is not the phase setting. See Figure 5-7B.

5.7A.20 Select Phase, then press the Function key.

Initially, the phase setting will reside somewhere in the range of 0 to 31. The
shaded area in the chart shown in Figure 5-7D represents the scale length
displayed on the phase adjustment screen of the OSD.

While observing the upper right area of the text screen:

5.7A.21 Use the key to decrease the phase adjustment until the characters
show distortion or flicker, then back up one step.

If you did not go below zero and start down the scale again on the
phase adjustment screen, record the setting.

If you went below zero and started down the scale again to obtain a
setting, find that number to the left (counter-clockwise) of the shaded
area in the outer row of the chart. Record its corresponding number in
the inner row. For example, if your setting is 27, then record a -5.

5.7A.22 Use the key to increase the phase adjustment until the characters
show distortion or flicker, then back down one step.

If you did not go above 31 on the phase adjustment scale, record the
setting.

If you went above 31 and started up the scale again to obtain a setting,
find that number to the right (clockwise) of the shaded area in the
outer row of the chart. Record its corresponding number in the inner
row. For example, if your setting is 3, then record a 35.

5-17C Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

SE INC
R EA RE
AS
C
DE E
15 16 17 1
3 14 8 1
1 2 1 9
11 1 4 15 16 17 1 20
10 1 2 13 8 1
9 2 21
1 1 0 22
9 2
10 1
2 23
8 9 2
8 23
7

24
24
7
6

25
6

25
5

26
5

26
4

27
4

27
3

28
3

28
2

29 3
29 30
2
1
1

0 31 0 1 2
0 31 0

31 32 33 34
-1 0
3 -2
29 3

-4 -

3
28

5
3
-5

36
27

4
-6

37
26

5
38
-7
25

6
39
-8

40
24

7
-941
- 10
42 23
8
9 43 2 -11 22
10 44 -1
45 46 -1 3 21
11 47 -16 -15 -14 20
12 1 9
13 1
4 15 16 17 18

Figure 5-7D. Phase Adjustment Chart


5.7A.23 Find the algebraic mean between your recorded numbers; if the mean
value is 5, 6 or 7, add 2 to the value. (Example: if the mean value is 6,
then the entered value will be 8.) Set the phase adjustment to that
value. Press the Function key to enter the value.

Position Adjustment:

5.7A.24 Use the key to select VIDEO POSITION ADJUST, then press the
Function key.

5.7A.25 Use the , , , keys to align the video image until all
information in the title bar, selection boxes at the top and bottom, and
white border lines are visible on both sides of the screen.

5.7A.26 Select Remove OSD and press the Function key.

5.7A.27 Touch the NM6000 screen anywhere to return to the service monitors
notebook.

Rev H 5-17D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.8 Touch Screen Calibration

Note: Touch screen calibration is needed whenever a monitor is replaced, or


when picture size or centering is adjusted. This ensures correct
registration of the touch screen coordinates with the picture.

NOTE: Do not calibrate touch screen from Primary Service Screen or cursor
will not appear.

5.8.1 Enter the service mode (ref. Section 2) and touch the Service Monitors
softkey to display the service monitors notebook.

5.8.2 Touch the Screen tab to display the touch screen calibration Service
Screen page.

5.8.3 Press the CALIBRATE TOUCH SCREEN key to display the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-8.

5.8.4 Select Mode 5 - Drag, and the two boxes at the bottom of the dialog box
should be un-checked.

5.8.5 Press the Calibrate >> key in the dialog box.

5.8.6 Three touchpoints will appear on the screen (upper left, lower right, and
upper right). Touch each one as it appears on the screen.

NOTE: If the cursor does not appear or cannot be moved properly, proceed to
the Advanced Touch Screen Calibration procedure.

5.8.7 Test the operation of the cursor by moving your finger around the screen
surface. The cursor should follow.

5.8.8 Press the OK key in the dialog box.

5.8.9 Touch the Exit Service key to return the monitor to normal operation.

5-18 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

Dialog Box ê

Figure 5-8. Touch


Screen Calibration

Rev. L 5-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.8A Advanced Touch Screen Calibration

NOTE: The advanced touch screen calibration procedure is needed when


calibration is not possible under the usual procedure described earlier.

5.8A.1 Connect a keyboard (P/N 4115133) to the DIN connector on the


underside of the NM6000 cockpit area as shown in Figure 5-8A. The
following operations are performed on this keyboard unless otherwise
noted.

5.8A.2 Unlock the keyboard by pressing CTRL-F9 and then ALT-F9.

5.8A.3 To display the Start menu press CTRL-ESC or Windows key, then
press S for Settings, then press C for Control Panel.

5.8A.4 With the Control Panel window displayed, use the cursor down and the
other cursor keys to highlight the selection for Touchscreen. Press
ENTER to display the touchscreen calibration window.

5.8A.5 Verify that the Drag button is selected, and the two boxes at the bottom
of the dialog box are un-checked. If they are not, use the cursor up and
down keys and press ENTER to make the desired selection. After each
selection is made you will return to the Control Panel screen. Press
ENTER to return to the Touchscreen calibration menu.

5.8A.6 On the keyboard, use the arrow keys to highlight the Calibrate button;
then press ENTER to run the calibration program.

5.8A.7 Three touchpoints will appear on the screen (upper left, lower right,
and upper right). Touch each one as it appears on the screen.

If the alarm window covers the upper left touchpoint, touch the upper
left corner of the screen (make a guess as to the first touchpoint
position), then touch the other two points. On the NM6000 screen,
press YES and OK. Move the alarm window to the bottom left of the
screen and repeat the touchpoint calibration.

5.8A.8 Close the touch screen calibration window by pressing OK on the


NM6000 screen.

5.8A.9 Touch the NM6000 screen anywhere within the control panel window,
then press ALT F4 on the keyboard.

5.8A.10 Disconnect the keyboard from the NM6000.

5-19A Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

Dialog Box é

SV00381

Figure 5-8A. Advanced Touch Screen Calibration

Rev. L
5-19B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.9 Ventilator Supply Pressure Adjustment (1.5 bar)

5.9.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.9.2 Close the cylinder valves. Remove the cylinders from their yokes. (Leave
the pipeline supplies connected.)

5.9.3 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

5.9.4 Disconnect the tube at the bottom of the ventilator O2 supply regulator
(see Figure 5-9. ) and connect a pressure meter to the hose barb on the
regulator. Contact DrägerService Technical Support for test equipment
configuration.

5.9.5 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.9.6 Adjust the regulator knob to achieve a pressure of 1.5 bar. (21.8 psi)

5.9.7 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.9.8 Disconnect the pressure meter and reconnect the original tube to the
hose barb on the restrictor.

5.9.9 Reinstall the back panel on the machine (unless you are making further
adjustments in this area).

5.9.10 Reinstall the cylinders in their yokes.

5.9.11 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch diameter
loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus HUB door
using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord socket as shown
in Figure 5-9A.

5.9.12 Perform the calibrations and operating mode verifications. Refer to


Section 6.17 Divan service mode and 6.18 Divan operating mode.

Rev. K
5-20
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

REAR VIEW

REGULATOR
ADJUSTMENT
HOSE BARB
(CONNECT PRESSURE
METER)

SV00386

Figure 5-9. Supply Pressure Regulator Adjustment

SV00396

CABLE CLAMP

POWER
CORD

Figure 5-9A. Power Cord Routing

Rev. K
5-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.10 Ventilator Supply Flow Adjustment (2L/min.)

NOTE: the ventilator supply pressure (1.5 bar) should be verified before making
this adjustment. Refer to Section 5.9.

5.10.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.10.2 Close the cylinder valves. Remove the cylinders from their yokes. (Leave
the pipeline supplies connected.)

5.10.3 Remove the rear panel below the yokes.

5.10.4 Disconnect the tube from the variable restrictor at the bottom of the
ventilator O2 supply regulator assembly. See Figure 5-10.

5.10.5 Connect a test flowmeter to the hose barb on the restrictor. Contact
DrägerService Technical Support for test equipment configuration.

5.10.6 Remove the breathing system (for front access to the flow adjustment).

5.10.7 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

5.10.8 Adjust the restrictor to achieve a flow rate of 2 L/min. (You will need to
remove a hole plug on the front of the machine for access to the flow
adjustment as shown in the illustration.)

5.10.9 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.10.10 Reinstall the hole plug on the front of the machine, and reinstall the
breathing system.

5.10.11 Disconnect the test flowmeter and reconnect the original tube to the
hose barb on the restrictor.

5.10.12 Reinstall the back panel on the machine.

5.10.13 Route the power cord’s strain relief with a loop in a clockwise direction.
The retaining clip shall be located 16.5 ±0.25 inches (5.25 inch diameter
loop approx.) from the cord end and secured to the Vitalbus HUB door
using the mounting hole dirrectly above the power cord socket as shown
in Figure 5-9A.

5.10.14 Reinstall the cylinders in their yokes.

5.10.15 Perform the calibrations and operating mode verifications. Refer to


Section 6.17 Divan service mode and 6.18 Divan operating mode.

5-22 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

REAR VIEW

SIDE VIEW
DETAIL

O2 SUPPLY
REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY

SV00192

VARIABLE
CONNECT TEST FLOWMETER HERE
RESTRICTOR

RESTRICTOR ADJUSTMENT
REMOVE HOLE PLUG FOR ACCESS TO
RESTRICTOR ADJUSTMENT
(SEE TEXT)

Figure 5-10. Ventilator Supply Flow Adjustment

Rev. A 5-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.11 Ventilator Control Pressure Adjustment (87 mbar)

NOTE: The vent supply pressure (1.5 bar) and ventilator supply flow
adjustments should be verified before making this adjustment. refer to
Sections 5.9 and 5.10.)

5.11.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.11.2 Remove the front bumper and front bezel from the Divan ventilator
chassis. This procedure is outlined under Ventilator Electronics
Assembly - Battery Replacement in Section 4. Do not disconnect the
ribbon cable.

5.11.3 Temporarily remove the breathing system.

5.11.4 Turn the System Power switch to ON, and place the Divan ventilator in
Service Mode.

5.11.5 Occlude pneumatic interface V2.

5.11.6 Hold a test pressure gauge to pneumatic interface V7. Use P/N 4115038
(PDM to patient suction adapter) w/silicon tube removed to connect V7
to the PDM.
LOCKING BAR

SU00203

V7 V1 V6 V3 V2

BREATHING SYSTEM PNEUMATIC INTERFACE


(VIEW FROM LEFT SIDE WITH BREATHING SYSTEM REMOVED)

5.11.7 Loosen the lock nut and adjust the 87 mbar safety valve (see Figure 5-
11. ) to achieve a pressure of 67 mm Hg (91 cm H2O) on the test gauge.
Tighten the lock nut.

5.11.8 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.11.9 Reinstall the breathing system.

5.11.10 Reassemble the Divan ventilator front bezel, bar and bumper.

5.11.11 Perform the calibrations and operating mode verifications. Refer to


Section 6.17 Divan service mode and 6.18 Divan operating mode.

5-24 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

ADJUSTING NUT LOCK NUT


(INCLUDES HOSE BARB)

SAFETY VALVE SV00194


PLATE

Figure 5-11. Ventilator Control Pressure Adjustment.

Rev. A 5-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.12 Breathing System Leveling Adjustment

The breathing system must be level (top surface parallel to back edge of
ventilator chassis). The left side of the breathing system (facing the front of the
machine) rests on two pins that project from the ventilator chassis. Each pin is
fixed to an eccentric mount that allows the left side of the breathing system to
be raised or lowered. A detail of the eccentric mount is shown in Figure 5-12.

The locknut for the rear mount can be reached through the back of the machine.
Access to the lock nut for the front mount requires removal of the Divan front
panel.

5.12.1 Turn the System Power Switch to STANDBY.

5.12.2 Disconnect all hoses from the breathing system.

5.12.3 Open the hinged top of the ventilator.

5.12.4 Turn the breathing system locking bar (¼ turn CCW) to unlock the
breathing system.

5.12.5 Grasp the breathing system handle and lift the unit from the machine

5.12.6 At each pin, loosen the eccentric mounting lock nut while holding the
pin in position with a hex wrench inserted in the end of the pin. Turn
the pin until it is at the desired position, and tighten the lock nut.

5.12.7 Reinstall the breathing system and ensure that it seats properly on the
pins. Repeat the previous step until the breathing system seats properly
when installed.

5.12.8 Lock the breathing system in place and close the top of the ventilator.

5.12.9 Reconnect all hoses that were previously disconnected from the
breathing system.

5.12.10 Turn the System Power switch to ON and observe the ventilator self
test routine - verify that there are no leaks in the system.

5.12.11 Ensure that the breathing system heater is activated when the
breathing system is put into place.

5-26 Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

TOP VIEW OF REAR ECCENTRIC MOUNT


DIVAN
BREATHING SYSTEM

BREATHING SYSTEM

LOCKING BAR

FRONT
ECCENTRIC DIVAN FRONT PANEL
MOUNT SIDE VIEW DETAIL
OF ECCENTRIC MOUNT:

PIN LOCK NUT

INSERT
HEX WRENCH SV00279

Figure 5-12. Breathing System Leveling Adjustment

Rev. A 5-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.13 Bag Pole Friction Adjustment

The bag pole spring pin friction adjustment screw is located at the back of the
bumper as shown in Figure 5-13.

Using a flat blade screwdriver, turn the screw in (clockwise) until it bottoms,
then back it out c of a turn.

BAG POLE

BAG POLE FRICTION


ADJUSTMENT SCREW

SV00036

Figure 5-13. Bag Pole Friction Adjustment Screw

5-28 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

5.14 Right Vaporizer Vertical Adjustment

This procedure applies only to machines of serial numbers 10188 and later.
Refer to the adjustment procedure in Section 7 for machines within the serial
number range of 10000 thru 10187.

This procedure outlines the steps needed to ensure correct exclusion system
operation in cases where there is difficulty in engaging the right (viewed from
the front) vaporizer.

5.14.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.14.2 Disconnect the semi-permeable tube at the water trap.

5.14.3 Loosen the captive mounting screw on the agent analyzer Pod and
remove the assembly from the machine.

5.14.4 Disconnect the Vitalbus cable and the exhaust line at the back of the
agent analyzer Pod.

5.14.5 Locate the vaporizer adjustment jack screw inside the cockpit
weldment. See Figure 5-14.

5.14.6 Loosen the set screw several turns and apply purple Loctite (#222) to
the threads. Re-tighten the set screw until contact is made with the
cockpit panel.

5.14.7 Carefully adjust the set screw clockwise until proper engagement into
the right mounted vaporizer is achieved.

5.14.8 Test the exclusion system for proper operation.

5.14.9 Reconnect the Vitalbus cable and the exhaust line at the back of the
analyzer.

5.14.10 Slide the analyzer into the machine and secure it with its captive
mounting screw.

5.14.11 Reconnect the semi-permeable tube to the water trap.

5.14.12 Perform the PMC Procedure given in Section 6.

Rev. E 5-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

SET SCREW
(INSERT INTO
THREADED STANDOFF.
SEE TEXT)

Figure 5-14. Vaporizer Set Screw Adjustment

5-30 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)

5.15 System Electrical Switch Adjustment

5.15.1 Turn System Power switch to STANDBY.

5.15.2 Disconnect AC power from the machine, and disable all circuit breakers
at the rear of the power supply.

5.15.3 Remove the bottom panel from the cockpit area.

5.15.4 Turn System Power switch to ON.

5.15.5 Loosen the switch mount bracket screws (Figure 5-15. rear view); move
the bracket toward the main switch and tighten the screws.

5.15.6 Loosen the lever switch mounting screws (Figure 5-16. top view) and
move the switch in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go.

5.15.7 Partially tighten switch mount screw A.

5.15.8 With screw A as a pivot, move the switch from side to side in an arc
about screw B to determine a mid-point, and set the switch at the mid-
point.

5.15.9 Tighten screws A and B.

5.15.10 Adjust the flat of the paddle until it is parallel to the switch lever.

5.15.11 Hold the switch lever away from the switch body, and turn the main
switch from ON to STANDBY. If the paddle engages the lever at the end
edge or passes under the lever, move the switch closer to the bracket
screws.

5.15.12 Using a 5/64 allen wrench in the switch housing access hole, readjust
the paddle to ensure correct switch actuation and overtravel. The
paddle should be turned in a counter-clockwise direction only, and no
more than ¼ turn from its setup position. Retest the previous step for
proper operation.

5.15.13 Reinstall the cockpit area bottom panel.

5.15.14 Restore AC power to the machine, and enable all circuit breakers.

5.15.15 Verify proper operation of the auxiliary oxygen flowmeter (6.10.4)

5.15.16 Verify proper operation of the main switch at STANDBY. Grasp the
switch and move it laterally left and right until satisfied with its
performance.

Rev. L 5-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued) NM6000

5.15.17 Turn the mainswitch to ON and verify that the system electronics
energize.

BRACKET
SCREWS (2X)

SV00371

SWITCH MOUNT BRACKET

Figure 5-15. Rear View of Main Switch Area

MAIN SWITCH

SWITCH MOUNT SWITCH


SCREW B HOUSING

PADDLE

ACCESS HOLE
USE A 5/64
LEVER SWITCH
ALLEN WRENCH

SWITCH MOUNT
SCREW A
SV00366

Figure 5-16. Top View of Main Switch Area

5-32 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE

6.0 PMC PROCEDURE, NARKOMED 6000


The procedures in this section shall be performed in their entirety each time a
component is removed, replaced, calibrated or adjusted, and during all scheduled
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification (PMC) visits. A Narkomed 6000 PMC
Checklist form, P/N 4115093, available from the DrägerService, shall be completed
by the Technical Service Representative each time a PMC is performed. If the
machine is equipped with an Integrated Patient Monitor (IPM) or strip chart
recorder, an IPM and strip chart recorder checklist form shall also be completed by
the technician. The section numbers on the PMC checklist form are keyed to
paragraph numbers in this manual. Steps in the procedure marked with (ü) require
a response at the corresponding line on the checklist form.

Space is also provided on the PMC Checklist form to record the results of a vapor
concentration test. Contact the Draeger Medical, Inc. Technical Service Department
for vapor concentration verification procedures.

NOTE:
Test equipment listed below with an asterisk (*) requires calibration at a
maximum interval of one year. Verify the dates on test equipment calibration
labels. DO NOT USE any test equipment having an expired calibration date.
Notify your supervisor immediately if any equipment is found to be out of
calibration.

In the space provided at the bottom of the PMS checklist form, record the
Model and ID number of all calibrated test equipment used.

Base Machine Test Equipment Required:


NOTE: If the machine is equipped with an IPM and/or strip chart recorder, refer
to Section 6A in this manual.
-- *Electrical Safety Analyzer (Biotek 501 Pro or equivalent)
-- *Test Pressure Gauge, P/N 4114807 or equivalent
-- *Flowmeter Test Stand (Capnomed), P/N S000081 or equivalent
-- *Test Minute Volume Meter, P/N 2212300 or equivalent
-- *Digital Pressure Manometer (SenSym PDM 200CD or equivalent)
-- *Riken Gas Indicator, Model 18H, or 1802D or equivalent
-- Stop Watch
-- Test Lung, Siemens P/N 4115128

Rev. H 6-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

Base Machine Materials Required:


-- Rubber goods set: Y-piece, elbow, 2x 32” x 22mm hoses, 2L bag P/N 1101071
-- Tube, corrugated, 22 mm x 12 in. long, P/N 9995112
-- Adapter assembly, test terminal, P/N 4104389 or equivalent: two are required
-- Adapter, CO2 calibration, P/N 4110216
-- Adapter, fresh gas leak test P/N 4115041
-- Adapter, GAP return P/N 4115040
-- Adapter, suction pipeline P/N 4115039
-- Molykote 55M grease P/N 4115127
-- Cylinder, Capnomed calibration gas P/N 4107979
-- Adapter, volumeter/freshgas hose P/N 4115042
-- Adapter, PDM to patient suction P/N 4115038
-- Adapter, connectors 33mm x 22mm P/N 4115087
-- Qdisc, male fresh gas P/N M31581
-- Adapter, airway w/luer fitting P/N 4108104
-- Tube, PVC sample line P/N 4108103
-- Breathing sys leak test device P/N S010159
-- Adapter, PDM to monitor P/N 4115043
-- Fitting, Luer lock (F) x c MPT P/N 4110709
-- Pipet, disposable P/N 4115090
-- Screwdriver D 1,2 x 8 x 150 Din 5265 P/N 7900864
-- Silicon Rubber, Walker Elastosil, E41g, 90 mL P/N 1202537

-- Kit, PMS NM6000, 6 month P/N 4115074-001


-- Kit, PMS NM6000, 1 year P/N 4115074-002
-- Kit, PMS NM6000, 2 year P/N 4115074-003
-- Kit, PMS NM6000, 3 year P/N 4115074-004

Special test fixtures are illustrated on following pages.

6-2 Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

CONNECT GAS 4110216


SAMPLE LINE CO2
CALIBRATION
ADAPTER

4107979
CAPNOMED
CALIBRATION
GAS

SV00369

TEST EQUIPMENT FOR AGENT


ANALYZER ACCURACY TEST

Rev. D 6-2A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

S010059 BREATHING SYSTEM LEAK TEST DEVICE

SV00373

4115041 FRESH GAS LEAK TEST ADAPTER

6-2B Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

SV00370

4115039 SUCTION PIPELINE ADAPTER

4115043 PDM TO MONITOR ADAPTER

Rev. A 6-2C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

SV00372

4115042 VOLUMETER/ FRESH GAS HOSE ADAPTER

4115040 GAP RETURN ADAPTER

4115038 PDM TO PATIENT SUCTION ADAPTER

6-2D Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

4108104
15mm(F) x 15mm(M)
AIRWAY ADAPTER
w/LUER(F) CONNECTOR

4110709
LUER(F) x1/8 MPT
4104389
TEST TERMINAL
ADAPTER FOR TOP PORT ADAPTER
ON CAPNOMED FLOW METER

4108103
96 IN. PVC SAMPLE LINE w/LUER FITTINGS

4115090 SV00374
DISPOSABLE PIPET

M31581
QDISC, MALE FRESH GAS

Rev. B 6-2E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

4114807 PRESSURE TEST ASSEMBLY , WITH ADAPTERS

SV00376

4114830-002 4114830-001

4114830-004 4114830-003

4114830-006 4114830-005

6-2F Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

SV00375

TEST
VOLUME
METER

4115087 33mm x 22mm ADAPTER

Rev. A 6-2G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

This page intentionally left blank

6-2H Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification General Instructions

The purpose of these procedures is to provide detailed instructions for performing a Periodic
Manufacturer’s Certification (PMC) inspection on the Narkomed 6000 anesthesia machines.

A PMC consists of a complete Periodic Manufacturer’s Service procedure and a certification


level inspection based on Draeger Medical, Inc. Recommendations and equipment
performance. Additional inspections are also performed to ensure proper product labeling.

Several additional documents have been created to assist the technician through the
process. Following is a brief description of the purpose of each document.

Field Service Procedure:


Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification Forms - Part Number SP00175.
This procedure illustrates the sample checklists with typical periodic maintenance items
filled in, including vapor concentration verification tests, parts replaced, general comments
and certification levels. Also included are sample PMC labels marked to show several levels
of certifications. An excerpt from Draeger Medical, Inc.’s Anesthesia System Risk Analysis
and Risk Reduction is included, and also a sample of an Executive Summary to be furnished
to the hospital’s Risk Manager or Chief of Anesthesia.

Field Service Procedure:


NAD Recommendation Guidelines Index Anesthesia Systems - Part Number S010250.
This Guideline was created to provide an assessment of each machine’s certification. It
contains various comprehensive overviews of possible equipment conditions and their
associated certification levels.

The first list in the Recommendation Guidelines is a reference chart for machine
certification based on equipment status. The second is an abbreviated summary of all NAD
Recommendations and Failure Codes including the Condition Number, Equipment
Condition, Recommended Corrections, Certification Code, and Tests Affected when
applicable.

There is also a matrix classified as “Failure Codes” which identifies the correct manner in
which to document equipment tests that fail, or were unable to be performed due to
circumstances beyond the control of the service technician performing the inspection. (Ex:
Air cylinder supply is unavailable to perform Air High Pressure Leak test.) The Failure
Codes section also indicates suggested resolution of the situation. Failure Code numbers
begin at 34 and use the same certification levels strategy, and carry the same weight as
NAD Recommendation equipment condition codes.

The next section of the guideline lists all NAD Recommendations identified at a machine’s
major assembly level. This section is divided into subsections titled: “Anesthesia System”,
“Vaporizers”, “Absorber System”, “Ventilator” and “Scavenger System”. The final matrix is
the most comprehensive index sorted by machine model and includes Equipment Condition,
Certification Code, and NAD Recommendations. It also specifies any suggested upgrade
path including ordering information that should be taken such as installing a Bellows with
Pressure Limit Control 4109664-S01 Kit, after market modification kit to a machine not
equipped with pressure limit control.

Rev. H 6-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

The letters A, B, C, D and the Roman Numerals I, II are used as codes in the individual
matrix for each model of anesthesia machine. The letters A, B, C, and D are used in
descending order to indicate the certification level of the equipment. They are as follows:

A = Certified
B = Certified with Recommendations
C = Conditionally Certified
D = No Certification

Roman Numerals I and II do not affect the certification level but rather are provided to give
further instructions to the end user as follows:

I= The system in its present configuration shall only be used with a CO2 monitor
incorporating an apnea warning. The operator of the system is advised to
frequently scan the CO2 readings and alarm thresholds.

II = The present configuration of equipment requires that the unit operate at all times
with an oxygen analyzer that includes a low oxygen warning. The operator of the
system is advised to frequently scan the oxygen readings and alarm limits.

Following is an explanation of machine certification levels:

Certified- No recommendations apply to machine being inspected. (Only item number 33 -


“No Recommendations” shall apply for this certification level.)

Certified with Recommendations- A numbered recommendation with a code of B


applies to the machine being examined.

Conditionally Certified- A numbered recommendation with a code of BC, BCI or BCII


applies to the machine being examined.

No Certification- A numbered recommendation with a code of D applies to the machine


being examined.

When multiple recommendations apply, use the above list in descending order from bottom
to top. For example, “No Certification would take precedence over “Conditionally Certified”
and “Certified with Recommendations”. “Conditionally Certified” would take precedence
over “Certified with Recommendations”.

For example:

A Narkomed Standard or Compact could have recommendation numbers 10, 11 and 15


apply.
10 - Breathing pressure monitor is not interfaced with anesthesia machine system power
switch or ventilator. Code is B.
11 - Ventilator is equipped with descending bellows and lacks CO2 monitoring. Code is D1.
15 - Vaporizser mounting using a vaporizer selection valve. Code is B.
The correct certification for this machine is D, which means “NO CERTIFICATION”, and
additional recommendation I applies.

6-4 Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

A Narkomed AMIII or Narkomed II could have recommendations 6 apply, and failure


code 46.2.
6 - Oxygen ratio monitor instead of oxygen ratio monitor controller. Code D II.
46.2 - O2 analyzer malfunction. Code D.
Correct certification for this machine is D, which means “NO CERTIFICATION”.

A Narkomed 2A could have recommendation numbers 12, 14 and 27 apply.


12 - No integrated exhaled CO2 monitor with user adjustable alarm limits. Code D1.
14 - CO2/Agent monitor exhaust port is not properly connected to waste gas disposal
system. Code B.
27 - Ventilator bellows asembly has a PEEP valve assembly. Code B.
Correct certification for this machine is D1, which means “NO CERTIFICATION”, and
additional recommendation I applies.

A Narkomed 3 could have recommendationnumber 21 and failure code 61.1 apply.


21 - No ventilator pressure limit control. Code is B.
61.1 - Enflurane agent is unavailable to test. Code is BC.
Correct certification for this machine is BC, which means CONDITIONALLY CERTIFIED
WITH RECOMMENDATIONS.

A Narkomed 4 could have recommendation numbers 14 and 21 apply.


14 - CO2/Agent monitor exhaust port is not properly connected to the waste gas scavenger.
Code B.
21 - No ventilator pressure limit control. Code B.
The correct certification for this machine is B, which means “CERTIFIED WITH
RECOMMENDATIONS”.

A Narkomed 2B, 2C or GS could have recommendation 30 apply.


30 - Anesthesia machine is equipped with inhalation anesthesia vaporizers without an
agent analyzer in the breathing system. Code B.
The correct certification for this machine is B, which means “CERTIFIED WITH
RECOMMENDATIONS”.

A Narkomed 6000 could have no NAD recommendations or failure codes apply. The correct
certification level for this machine is Code A, “CERTIFIED”.

Code D, which means “NO CERTIFICATION”, also means the machine shall not
receive a Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification label. The machine shall also
receive a “WARNING - This System is Not Certified” label, P/N 4114857. This label
shall be placed at a prominent location on the right side of the machine after all
other previous PM and “Vigilance Audit® Validation” labels have been removed.

Rev. H 6-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 6000 Anesthesia System

1. Use the PM Certification form P/N 4115093 for the Narkomed 6000 Anesthesia
System. If the system is equipped with an Integrated Patient Monitor or Strip
Chart Recorder, use the Integrated Monitor and Strip Chart form P/N 4116820.

2. Completely fill in the header information.

3. Perform the vapor concentration test on all Dräger vapor vaporizers every six
months in accordance with SP00073 at a six month maximum interval. Perform
the vaporizer concentration test on all Desflurane vaporizers in accordance with
SP00091 for fixed mount vaporizsers and SP00189 for user removable D-tec
vaporizers at a six month maximum interval. For every vaporizer tested, fill out
a “VAPOR VAPORIZER CALIBRATION CHECK” label (part # S010016).
Information on this label shall include your signature, type of agent, date
tested, test results @ 1%, 2.5%, 4% for H, E, I, or S vaporizers, or @ 4%, 6%, 10%,
12%, 16% for Desflurane vaporizesrs, and a PASS or FAIL indication. This label
shall be attached to the upper right side of the vaporizer. If vaporizer fails the
concentration verification, internal leak, or exclusion system tests, check “NO”
in the “RECOMMENDED FOR USE” section on the PM Certification form.

Place a “CAUTION DO NOT USE” label (part # 4114327) on the vaporizer, and
issue a departmental alert. The TSR shall also seek permission from the
equipment operator to remove the failed vaporizer from the machine and install
a replacement vaporizer or an adapter block onto the mount.All nonfunctional
Dräger vaporizers must be removed from service for machine to receive
certification.

4. Proceed with PM Certification in accordance with Section 6 and Section 6A if


equipped with an Integrated Patient Monitor or Strip Chart Recorder. If any
tests fail refer to the “Failure Codes” listing in NAD Recommendations
Guidelines Index, P/N S010250, to determine correct certification level starting
point. Failure codes shall be documented on the “RECOMMENDATIONS /
GENERAL COMMENTS” section of the PM Certification form and on the
Executive Summary if applicable. If a test fails that has not been identified by
the “Failure Codes” list, consult with Draeger Medical, Inc. to assess the proper
certification level.

6-6 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 6000 Anesthesia System

5. Based on the “EQUIPMENT CONDITION” inspect the machine for any “NAD
RECOMMENDATIONS” that would apply. Use the Narkomed 6000 section of
the “NAD RECOMMENDATION GUIDELINES INDEX”, P/N S010250. Note
all applicable NAD recommendations on the Executive Summary. NOTE: If
using a carbon form, indicate the Equipment Condition number and to see
reverse side under “RECOMMENDATIONS / GENERAL COMMENTS” section
of the form.

6. Determine the correct certification level of the machine based on the combined
lowest common denominator of “Equipment Conditions” and “Failure Codes”. If
the machine is at least conditionally certified, fill out the “PM
CERTIFICATION” label. Check the box(s) on the validation label where
appropriate. Write the month and year, (three months from date of PM
Certification) next to “NEXT VISIT DUE:” If certification level is “D”, machine
shall not receive a “PM CERTIFICATION” label. Any machine not receiving a
PM Certification label shall receive a “WARNING NOT CERTIFIED” label. This
label shall be placed at a prominent location on the left side of the machine after
all other previous PMS and Vigilance Audit Validation labels have been
removed.

7. In the “CERTIFICATION LEVEL” section of the PM Certification form, record


the last visit certification level, the current certification level and the next visit
due month and year, (three months from date of PM Certification) in the spaces
provided.

8. If applicable, remove the previous PM CERTIFICATION VALIDATION label


and attach the new label in a prominent location on the rear of the anesthesia
machine.

9. Check the appropriate boxes on the “PM CERTIFICATION NOTICE” label,


(part # S010011). If the machine is not certified, the last box of this notice label
shall be checked. Attach this notice to the flow shield of the anesthesia machine.

10. Have the customer sign each PM Certification form or the Executive Summary,
and review the equipment conditions and recommendations with the customer.

11. Return the top copy to Draeger Medical, Inc. Service Department, keep middle
copy for service organization records, give bottom copy to customer.

Rev. H 6-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.1 Service Menu

6.1.1 Setup Notebook

6.1.1.1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup Notebook

6.1.1.2 Press the ABOUT tab to display the About page

6.1.1.3 Press the following keys in this order:


--Volume, Pressure, Oxygen
--Gas Analysis
--NM6000
--Strip Chart Recorder

6.1.1.4 Press OK to enter the Service Mode

6.1.2 Service Data

6.1.2.1 Press the NM6000 tab, the Service Config. key, and the
NM6K tab.

6.1.2.2 Press the PMC key

6.1.2.3 Enter your technical service ID and press OK. Press Cancel
to close the Service Replacement Parts dialog box.

(✔) 6.1.2.4 Record the Last Service Date

(✔) 6.1.2.5 Record the Hours Running Since Last Service

(✔) 6.1.2.6 Record the Total Machine Run Hours

6.1.2.7 Press RESET LAST SERVICE DATE

(✔) 6.1.2.8 Advance the PMS Due Date three months ahead and record
the date.

(✔) 6.1.2.9 Enter the Service Log menu and press the Refresh key;
identify any critical events.

(✔) 6.1.2.10 Record the unit serial number

(✔) 6.1.3 Service Dump

6.1.3.1 Press the Service Dump key

6.1.3.2 Verify that GAP and VPO exception errors are all zeros.

6-8 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.1.4 Service Monitors

6.1.4.1 Press the Service Monitors key to display the Service


Monitors notebook

(✔) 6.1.4.2 Press the Oxygen tab and follow the instructions to perform
an O2 zero calibration

(✔) 6.1.4.3 Press the Pressure tab and follow the instructions to perform
a Zero and Span calibration

(✔) 6.1.4.4 Press the Screen tab and perform the touch screen
calibration.

NOTE: An advanced touch screen calibration procedure is needed


when calibration is not possible under the usual procedure. Refer to
Section 5 for the complete procedures.

(✔) 6.1.4.5 Press the Ports tab and verify that settings are correct for
any interfaced devices

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling the PCB assemblies. Static
discharge can damage components on these assemblies.

6.1.5 Press the Service Config key; Press the SERVICE PARTS key. Refer to
the machine’s replacement components log and install any scheduled
replacement parts required.

(✔) 6.1.5.1 Record any scheduled parts replaced - in the Service Log and
on the report.

Scheduled parts replacement intervals are shown in the table on the


following page.

6.1.5.2 Press the Exit Service key.

6.1.5.3 Press the OK button at the bottom of the Service Mode


window.

6.1.5.4 Press the To Primary Keys key.

Rev. M 6-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

SCHEDULED REPLACEMENT PARTS ON NM6000

Interval P/N Description Qty

M29664 Roller Diaphragm (patient side) 1

6 Month Kit 8404065 Lip Seals (pneumatic interface) 5


P/N 4115074-001 4114887 Filter 1

4115961 Semi-permeable tube 1

4115864 O-ring (vapor mount) 4

M29664 Roller Diaphragm (patient side) 1


1 Year Kit 8404065 Lip Seals (pneumatic interface) 5
P/N 4115074-002
4114887 Filter 1

4115961 Semi-permeable tube 1

8407979 Sealing Washer (breasy) 2

8410181 Diaphragm (breasy) 2

M30462 Diaphragm (breasy) 3

M27721 Lip Seal (piston interface to breasy) 1


2 Year Kit
P/N 4115074-003 8404065 Lip Seal (piston interface to Divan) 2

4115864 O-ring (vapor mount) 4

M29664 Roller Diaphragm (patient side) 1

8404065 Lip Seals (pneumatic interface) 5

4116144 Lithium Battery, 3V (WPU) 1

4114887 Filter 1

4115961 Semi-permeable tube 1

1841688 Lithium Battery (TK-RAM, IRIA PCB) 1

8301856 9V Battery (Divan motherboard) 1

M29664 Roller Diaphragm (patient side) 1


3 Year Kit
P/N 4115074-004 8404065 Lip Seals (pneumatic interface) 5

4115864 O-ring (vapor mount) 4

4114887 Filter 1

4115961 Semi-permeable tube 1

6-10 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.2 Battery Circuit

6.2.1 With the System Power switch ON, Press the PERFORM BATTERY
TEST key in the SETUP notebook.

6.2.2 Is BATTERY TEST REQUESTED message displayed? ___(Y)

6.2.3 Does the Battery Test pass? ___(Y)

6.2.4 Unplug the AC power cord.

6.2.5 Does the AC PWR FAIL message appear on the monitor? ___(Y)

6.2.6 Plug in the AC power cord.

6-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.3 Open Reservoir Scavenger - if applicable

6.3.1 Cleaning

6.3.1.1 Remove the scavenger hose and drain any accumulated


moisture. Inspect the hose for deterioration and replace it if
needed.

6.3.1.2 Disconnect the hospital vacuum source from the scavenger.

6.3.1.3 Remove the scavenger mounting screws.

6.3.1.4 Remove the four screws securing the access panel at the
bottom of the scavenger canister.

6.3.1.5 Remove and inspect the silencer; replace if needed.

6.3.1.6 Remove the flowmeter from its housing by turning it counter-


clockwise. Inspect the tube and clean it with compressed air
if needed.

6.3.1.7 Reassemble the scavenger, and reactivate the vacuum source.

6.3.2 Negative Pressure Relief test:

6.3.2.1 Connect a DISS vacuum hose to the threaded terminal on the


scavenger. Alternatively, a hose barb adapter can be used to
attach a wall suction hose to the scavenger.

6.3.2.2 Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose (P/N 9995112) from


the inspiratory valve to the expiratory valve on the absorber.
Set the Divan to the Manual/Spontaneous Mode.

6.3.2.3 Verify that the suction waste gas disposal system is active.

6.3.2.4 Adjust the scavenger needle valve until the flowmeter


indicates between the white lines. Close all flow control
valves on the anesthesia machine.

6.3.2.5 Ensure that the unused scavenger port has the sealing plug
in place.

6.3.2.6 Uncap the hose barb adapter at the rear of the scavenger and
connect a test pressure monitor to the hose barb on the
adapter and observe the reading on the test gauge. The gauge
shall indicate a pressure of 0 to -0.5 cm H2O.

6-12 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.3.3 Positive Pressure Relief test:

6.3.3.1 Turn the scavenger needle valve fully clockwise (closed).

6.3.3.2 Open the oxygen flow control valve on the anesthesia


machine to a flow of 10 L/min.

6.3.3.3 The flow of oxygen shall now exit the system through the
relief ports at the top of the canister. The test pressure gauge
shall indicate a pressure of less than 1.0 cm H2O.

6.3.3.4 After the test, remove test equipment, re-cap the scavenger
adapter port and reconnect the scavenger hose. Readjust the
scavenger needle valve for a flowmeter indication halfway
between the two white lines.

(✔) 6.4 Scavenger Interface, A/C - if applicable

6.4.1 Cleaning

6.4.1.1 Remove the scavenger hose and drain any accumulated


moisture. Inspect the hose for deterioration and replace it if
needed.

6.4.1.2 Remove the safety relief valve housing by unscrewing it in a


counter-clockwise direction.

6.4.1.3 Inspect the O-ring and replace it if needed.

6.4.1.4 Remove the safety relief valve from its housing by twisting it
out in a counter-clockwise direction. The tips of locking
needle-nose pliers can be used to turn the valve. Be careful
not to damage the disk.

6.4.1.5 Remove any accumulated lint or dust from the valve with a
soft brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow
of clean air or oxygen. The scavenger body can be cleaned
with a moist cloth.

6.4.1.6 Reinstall the valve into the housing, making sure that it is
threaded all the way into the housing and that the plastic
washer is properly seated on its upper surface.

6.4.1.7 Make sure that the interior of the valve body is completely
dry. Reinstall the valve housing onto the scavenger body,
making sure that the O-ring is properly seated.

Rev. M 6-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.4.2 Positive Pressure Relief test:

6.4.2.1 Reconnect the scavenger hose between the bottom of the


Divan and the scavenger. Ensure that the unused scavenger
port has the sealing plug in place.

6.4.2.2 Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose (P/N 9995112) from


the inspiratory valve to the expiratory valve on the absorber.

6.4.2.3 Set the Divan to the Manual/Spontaneous Mode.

6.4.2.4 Set the oxygen flow to 10 L/min. and occlude the bottom port
on the scavenger.

6.4.2.5 The flow of oxygen will eventually exit the system through
the positive pressure safety relief valve. At this point, the
breathing pressure waveform on the monitor shall indicate a
pressure of 10.0 cm H2O or less.

6.5 Suction Regulator

6.5.1 Verify that the suction bottle is attached to the suction regulator.

6.5.2 Verify that a vacuum hose is attached to the ¾ in. DISS vacuum
connection.

6.5.3 Set the vacuum on/off valve to the OFF (vertical) position.

6.5.4 Using a PDM/suction adapter P/N 4115038, connect a digital pressure


meter to the collecting inlet stem of the suction bottle.

6.5.5 Set the digital pressure meter to the mmHg scale.

6.5.6 Turn the vacuum control knob fully counter-clockwise.

(✔) 6.5.7 What is the vacuum indicated on the digital pressure meter? (0)

6.5.8 Turn the vacuum control knob fully clockwise and verify that the
vacuum control knob stops.

6.5.9 Set the vacuum on/off valve to the ON position.

6.5.10 Set the regulator to indicate 250 mmHg.

(✔) 6.5.11 What is the vacuum indicated on the digital pressure meter? (200-300
mmHg)

6.5.12 Remove the test equipment and return all controls to their original
positions.

6-14 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.6 Suction Switch

6.6.1 Remove the patient suction assembly.

6.6.2 Set the suction switch to the closed (down) position.

6.6.3 Activate the hospital vacuum pipeline supply.

6.6.4 Connect a pressure measuring device and suction adapter w/squeeze


bulb (P/N 4115039) to the suction fitting on the left side of the
NM6000.

6.6.5 Pressurize the connection to 50 cm H2O.

6.6.6 After 10 seconds, what is the pressure? ___(>30 cm H2O)

6.6.7 Remove the squeeze bulb and replace it with a test terminal (P/N
4104389), 33mm x 22mm adapter (P/N 4115087) and volumeter.

6.6.8 Set the suction switch to the open (up) position.

6.6.9 What is the suction pipeline flow rate? ___(>30L/min)

6.6.10 Remove all test equipment and reconnect the patient suction
assembly.

Rev. M 6-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.7 High Pressure Leak

(✔) 6.7.1 Yoke Verification

6.7.1.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, and close all
cylinder valves.

6.7.1.2 Disconnect the pipeline supply hoses at the wall outlets.

6.7.1.3 Remove the closed cylinder or yoke plug from each yoke
assembly.

6.7.1.4 Do all the yoke handles adjust smoothly? ___(Y)

6.7.1.5 Are the two (2) yoke pins installed securely in each yoke?
___(Y)

6.7.1.6 Is there only one (1) cylinder washer on each yoke assembly?
___(Y)

6.7.1.7 Is there a yoke plug attached to each yoke assembly? ___(Y)

6.7.1.8 Is the proper gas identification label attached to each yoke


assembly? ___(Y)

6.7.1.9 Attach a cylinder to each yoke assembly.

(✔) 6.7.2 Nitrous Oxide High Pressure Leak Test - if applicable

6.7.2.1 Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve and one (1) nitrous oxide
cylinder valve.

6.7.2.2 Does the cylinder gauge respond properly? ___ (Y)

6.7.2.3 Let the pressure stabilize.

6.7.2.4 Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and remove the
cylinder.

6.7.2.5 Observe the nitrous oxide cylinder pressure gauge.

6.7.2.6 Is the nitrous oxide cylinder gauge cover label correct? ___(Y)

6.7.2.7 After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___PSI (<50)

6.7.2.8 Attach the cylinder.

6-16
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.7.3 Oxygen High Pressure Leak Test

6.7.3.1 Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.

6.7.3.2 Does the cylinder gauge respond properly? ___(Y)

6.7.3.3 Let the pressure stabilize.

6.7.3.4 Close the oxygen cylinder valve and remove both oxygen
cylinders.

6.7.3.5 Observe the oxygen cylinder pressure gauge.

6.7.3.6 Is the oxygen cylinder gauge cover label correct? ___(Y)

6.7.3.7 After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___PSI (<50)

6.7.3.8 Attach the cylinders.

(✔) 6.7.4 Air High Pressure Leak Test - if applicable

6.7.4.1 Open the Air cylinder valve.

6.7.4.2 Does the gauge respond properly? ___(Y)

6.7.4.3 Let the pressure stabilize.

6.7.4.4 Close the air cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.

6.7.4.5 Observe the air cylinder pressure gauge.

6.7.4.6 Is the air cylinder gauge cover label correct? ___(Y)

6.7.4.7 After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___psi (<50)

6.7.4.8 Attach the cylinder.

6-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.8 Regulator and Pipeline Gauges

Minimum cylinder pressures for regulator tests are:


N2O & CO2: 600 psi; O2, Air, He, He/O2, N2: 1000 psi.
6.8.1 N2O Regulator

6.8.1.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON, and press the Divan
Standby key.

6.8.1.2 Configure the test gauge (P/N 4114807) using a female N2O
DISS connector (P/N 4114830-004) on the hose and male N2O
DISS connector (P/N 4114830-003) on the valve body side.

6.8.1.3 Connect the test fixture hose to the machine’s nitrous oxide
pipeline inlet.

6.8.1.4 Does the back panel correctly identify the nitrous oxide inlet?
___(Y)

6.8.1.5 Connect the nitrous oxide pipeline supply hose to the test
fixture.

6.8.1.6 Open the nitrous oxide and the oxygen cylinder valves.

6.8.1.7 Set the oxygen and nitrous oxide flows to 4 L/min.

6.8.1.8 Depress the push button on the test device.

(✔) 6.8.1.9 Release the push button. After the pressure decay stabilizes,
what is the regulator output pressure? ___psi (40-49)

NOTE: If a pressure decrease does not occur, either the hospital’s


supply pressure is too low or the regulator pressure is set too
high.

(✔) 6.8.2 N2O Pipeline Gauge Accuracy

6.8.2.1 Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and drain all nitrous
oxide pressure.

6.8.2.2 Depress and hold the push button on the test device.

6.8.2.3 Does the nitrous oxide gauge respond properly? ___(Y)

6.8.2.4 After the pressure stabilizes, are the indicated pressures on


the test gauge and the nitrous oxide pressure gauge within 5
psi of each other? ___(Y)

6-18 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.8.3 N2O Pipeline Leak

6.8.3.1 Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.

6.8.3.2 Release the test device push button.

6.8.3.3 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure loss? ___psi (<5)

6.8.3.4 Remove the test equipment and reconnect the nitrous oxide
pipeline hose.

6.8.4 Air Regulator - if applicable

6.8.4.1 Configure the test gauge (P/N 4114807) using a female air
DISS connector (P/N 4114830-002) on the hose and a male
DISS connector (P/N 4114830-001) on the valve body side.

6.8.4.2 Connect the test fixture hose to the machine’s air pipeline
inlet.

6.8.4.3 Does the back panel correctly identify the air inlet? ___(Y)

6.8.4.4 Connect the air pipeline supply hose to the test fixture.

6.8.4.5 Set the air flow to 4 L/min.

6.8.4.6 Depress the push button on the test device.

(✔) 6.8.4.7 Release the push button. After the pressure decay stabilizes,
what is the regulator output pressure? ___psi (based upon
cylinder pressure as given in the following table)

Compensated Regulator
Cylinder Pressure (psi)
output tolerances (-4/+2)

2000 38 - 44 (*41 - 47)

1800 39 - 45 (*42 - 48)

1600 40 - 46 (*43 - 49)

1400 41 - 47 (*44 - 50)

1200 42 - 48 (*45 - 51)

1000 43 - 49 (*46 - 52)

* Canada settings
NOTE: If a pressure decrease does not occur, either the hospital’s
supply pressure is too low or the regulator pressure is set too
high.

Rev. M 6-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.8.5 Air Pipeline Gauge Accuracy - if applicable

6.8.5.1 Close the air cylinder valve and drain all air pressure.

6.8.5.2 Depress the push button on the test device.

6.8.5.3 Does the air gauge respond properly? ___(Y)

6.8.5.4 After the pressure stabilizes, are the indicated pressures on


the test gauge and the air pressure gauge within 5 psi of each
other? ___(Y)

(✔) 6.8.6 Air Pipeline Leak

6.8.6.1 Close the air flow control valve

6.8.6.2 Release the test device push button

6.8.6.3 After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure loss? ___psi
(<5)

6.8.6.4 Remove the test equipment and reconnect the air pipeline
hose.

6.8.7 O2 Regulator

6.8.7.1 Configure a test gauge using a female O2 DISS connector on


the hose and a male O2 DISS connector on the valve body
side.

6.8.7.2 Connect the test fixture hose to the machine’s oxygen


pipeline inlet.

6.8.7.3 Connect the oxygen pipeline supply hose to the test fixture.

6.8.7.4 Does the back panel correctly identify the oxygen inlet?
___(Y)

6.8.7.5 Set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

6.8.7.6 Depress the push button on the test device.

6-20 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.8.7.7 Release the push button. After the pressure decay stabilizes,
what is the regulator output pressure? ___psi (based upon
cylinder pressure as given in the following table)

Compensated Regulator
Cylinder Pressure (psi)
output tolerances (-4/+2)

2000 38 - 44 (*41 - 47)

1800 39 - 45 (*42 - 48)


1600 40 - 46 (*43 - 49)

1400 41 - 47 (*44 - 50)

1200 42 - 48 (*45 - 51)


1000 43 - 49 (*46 - 52)

* Canada settings

NOTE: If a pressure decrease does not occur, either the hospital’s


supply pressure is too low or the regulator pressure is set too
high.

(✔) 6.8.8 O2 Pipeline Gauge Accuracy

6.8.8.1 Close the oxygen cylinder valve and drain all oxygen
pressure.

6.8.8.2 Depress the push button on the test device.

6.8.8.3 Does the oxygen gauge respond properly? ___(Y)

6.8.8.4 After the pressure stabilizes, are the indicated pressures in


the test gauge and the oxygen pressure gauge within 5 psi of
each other? ___(Y)

(✔) 6.8.9 O2 Pipeline Leak

6.8.9.1 Release the test device push button

6.8.9.2 After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure loss? ___psi
(<5)

Rev. L 6-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.9 Oxygen Supply Failure Protection

(✔) 6.9.1 N2O OFP Device

6.9.1.1 Connect the O2 and N2O pipeline supplies.

6.9.1.2 Open the N2O cylinder valve, if applicable.

6.9.1.3 Verify that the System Power switch is ON.

NOTE: This test can not be performed during the ventilator self test or
while the ventilator is in the Standby Mode.

6.9.1.4 Press the Manual/Spontaneous button on the ventilator


control panel to cancel the self test and set Manual/
Spontaneous Mode. If the Divan displays COMPLETE TEST,
press the Ventilator Override switch.

6.9.1.5 Depress the push button on the test fixture.

6.9.1.6 Adjust the O2 and N2O flow to 4 L/min.

6.9.1.7 Close the O2 pipeline supply.

6.9.1.8 Does the flow of nitrous oxide cease when the oxygen
pressure is depleted? ___(Y)

6.9.1.9 Close the N2O pipeline supply.

6.9.1.10 Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.

(✔) 6.9.2 Air OFP Device

6.9.2.1 Open the O2 and Air pipeline supplies.

6.9.2.2 Set the air flow to 4 L/min.; set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

6.9.2.3 Close the pipeline O2 pipeline supply.

6.9.2.4 Does the flow of air cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___(Y)

6.9.2.5 Close the Air pipeline supply.

6.9.2.6 Close the air flow control valve.

6-22 Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.9.3 O2 Low Pressure Alarm

6.9.3.1 Depress and hold the test device push button.

6.9.3.2 Verify that minimum O2 flow is present.

6.9.3.3 Release the test device push button.

(✔) 6.9.3.4 What is the pressure on the test gauge when the LO O2
SUPPLY message appears on the monitor? ___psi (34-40)

6.9.3.5 Does the LO O2 SUPPLY message appear on the central


alarm display? ___(Y)

6.10 Flowmeters

(✔) 6.10.1 Oxygen Flowmeter Test

6.10.1.1 Open the oxygen cylinder valve.

6.10.1.2 Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of
the flowmeters? ___(Y)

6.10.1.3 Close the O2 cylinder valve and bleed the pressure from the
system.

6.10.1.4 Connect the O2 pipeline hose.

6.10.1.5 Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of
the flowmeters? ___(Y)

6.10.1.6 Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the
oxygen flow control valve? ___(Y)

6.10.1.7 Close the oxygen flow control valve.

(✔) 6.10.1.8 What is the minimum flow of oxygen? ___mL (150-200)

6-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.10.2 Nitrous Oxide Flowmeter Test

6.10.2.1 Set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

6.10.2.2 Open the nitrous oxide cylinder valve - if applicable.

6.10.2.3 Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full
range of the flowmeters? ___(Y)

6.10.2.4 Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and bleed the pressure
from the system.

6.10.2.5 Connect the N2O pipeline hose.

6.10.2.6 Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full
range of the flowmeters? ___(Y)

6.10.2.7 Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the N2O
flow control valve? ___(Y)

6.10.2.8 Close the oxygen and nitrous oxide flow control valves.

(✔) 6.10.3 Air Flowmeter Test

6.10.3.1 Connect the Air pipeline hose.

6.10.3.2 Is it possible to adjust the flow of air over the full range of the
flowmeter? ___(Y).

6.10.3.3 Close the air flow control valve.

6.10.3.4 Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the air
flow control valve? ___(Y)

6-24
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.10.4 Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter Test

6.10.4.1 Connect a test pressure monitor to the outlet using a PDM


adapter.

6.10.4.2 Bleed any pressure from the test device.

6.10.4.3 Is there an increase in pressure? ___(N)

6.10.4.4 Increase the pressure to 50 cm H2O.

6.10.4.5 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure? ___ cm H2O (30-50)

6.10.4.6 Remove the test gauge.

6.10.4.7 Is it possible to adjust the flow over the full range of the
flowmeter? ___(Y)

6.10.4.8 Set the flow rate to 5 L/min.

6.10.4.9 Hold the sensor from a calibrated O2 Med at the flowmeter


outlet.

6.10.4.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___% (>80)

6.10.4.11 Remove the O2 Med sensor.

6.10.4.12 Close the flowmeter flow control valve.

6.11 Oxygen Analyzer

6.11.1 Disconnect the O2 sensor cord at the sensor interface panel. The
Advisory messages O2 SENS DISC shall appear on the central alarm
display, and a single tone audible alarm shall sound.

6.11.2 Reconnect the O2 sensor cord.

6.11.3 Touch the O2 CAL soft key, and select YES in the confirm window.
Note: Make sure the sensor is exposed to only 21% O2 (room air).

(✔) 6.11.4 After calibration is completed, what is the displayed oxygen


concentration? ___% (21)

6.11.5 Open the notebook, select Alarms, touch the oxygen NUMERIC box. Is
the box highlighted? ___(Y)

6.11.6 Set the O2 LO alarm limit to 30%.

6-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.11.7 The Warning message % OXYGEN LOW shall appear on the central
alarm display, and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.

6.11.8 Verify that the oxygen LO alarm limit has a range from 18 to 99%.

6.11.9 Set the LO limit to 18.

6.11.10 What is the HI oxygen alarm default? ___ (100)

6.11.11 Touch the SET HI button in the alarm page of the O2 notebook.

6.11.12 Verify that the oxygen HI alarm limit has a range from 100 to 19%

6.11.13 Set the HI limit to 19.

6.11.14 Expose the O2 sensor to room air (21% O2).

6.11.15 The Advisory message % OXYGEN HI shall appear on the central


alarm display, and a single tone audible alarm shall sound.

6.11.16 Adjust the HI limit to 100%

(✔) 6.11.17 The INSP O2 HIGH message shall be extinguished.

6.11.18 Touch the Oxygen Numeric box to close the notebook.

6.11.19 Place the sensor into the valve dome, set the oxygen flow to 10 L/min.,
select MAN/SPONT on the Divan.

6.11.20 Verify that the APL valve toggle switch is set to MAN and the APL
control is set to 30 cm H2O.

6.11.21 Attach an open 22 mm hose to the inspiratory connector and verify


that a bag is connected to the bag hose.

(✔) 6.11.22 After 3 minutes, what is the oxygen concentration? ___% (97-100)

6.11.23 Close the oxygen flow control valve.

6-26
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.12 Oxygen Concentration Tests

6.12.1 Oxygen + Nitrous Oxide Concentration Test

6.12.1.1 Verify that the Divan is in Manual/Spontaneous mode.

6.12.1.2 Verify that the APL valve toggle switch is set to MAN and the
APL control is set to 30 cm H2O.

6.12.1.3 Verify that an open 22 mm hose is attached to the inspiratory


connector and occlude the Divan bag port with a test
terminal and squeeze bulb.

6.12.1.4 Insert a calibrated O2 sensor into the valve dome adapter on


the inspiratory valve.

6.12.1.5 Close all the flow control valves.

6.12.1.6 Open one (1) cylinder valve or pipeline for each gas.

6.12.1.7 Depress the O2 Flush for 5 seconds.

6.12.1.8 Set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

6.12.1.9 Is the O2 concentration 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___(Y)

6.12.1.10 Set the nitrous oxide flow to 2 L/min.

(✔) 6.12.1.11 What is the oxygen concentration? ___% (64-70)

6.12.1.12 Close all flow control valves.

6.12.2 Oxygen + Air Concentration Test

6.12.2.1 Depress the O2 Flush for 5 seconds.

6.12.2.2 Is the O2 concentration 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___(Y)

6.12.2.3 Set the oxygen flow to 4L/min.

6.12.2.4 Set the air flow to 2 L/min.

(✔) 6.12.2.5 What is the oxygen concentration? ___% (71-77)

6.12.2.6 Close all flow control valves.

6.12.2.7 Close the oxygen flow control valve.

6-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.13 Oxygen Ratio Control

6.13.1 Depress the O2 Flush for 5 seconds.

6.13.2 Set the oxygen flow to 1000 mL.

6.13.3 Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to the stop position.

(✔) 6.13.4 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)

6.13.5 Set the oxygen flow to 1.5 L/min.

(✔) 6.13.6 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)

6.13.7 Set the oxygen flow to 2 L/min.

(✔) 6.13.8 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)

6.13.9 Set the oxygen flow to 4 L/min.

(✔) 6.13.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)

6.13.11 Reduce the O2 flow to 500 mL/min. Verify that the N2O flow is greater
than or equal to 600 mL/min.

6.13.12 Close the oxygen flow control valve.

(✔) 6.13.13 What is the flow of nitrous oxide? ___ (375-750 mL/min.)

6.13.14 What is the oxygen concentration with the O2 flow control valve
closed? ___ % (>21)

6.13.15 If the machine is configured for Air-Only mode, engage this feature
and verify the O2 and N2O flows stop.

6.13.16 Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.

6-28 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.14 Fresh Gas Leak Test

6.14.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

6.14.2 Remove the hose connector from the fresh gas inlet of the Divan.

6.14.3 Connect a digital pressure manometer and special Fresh Gas Leak
Test Device to the fresh gas hose.

6.14.4 Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.

(✔) 6.14.5 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___ (>40 cm
H2O)

6.14.6 Turn on the left mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking.

6.14.7 Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.

(✔) 6.14.8 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___ (>40 cm
H2O)

6.14.9 Turn off the vaporizer.

6.14.10 Remove the test equipment from the fresh gas outlet.

6.14.11 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

6.14.12 Open the O2 flow control valve to 5 L/min., purge the system for 5
seconds, then close the O2 flow control valve.

6.14.13 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

(✔) 6.14.14 If applicable, turn on the right mounted vaporizer to the first
graduated marking; repeat Steps 6.14.7 thru 6.14.13. ___ (>40 cm
H2O)

6.14.15 Is the fresh gas outlet labeled correctly? ___(Y)

6-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.15 Minimum O2 Control Solenoid Test

6.15.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON and close all flow control valves.

6.15.2 If minimum flow is disabled, skip to the next step. If minimum flow is
enabled, allow the Divan to begin the self test by following and
confirming the prompts. At Divan test Number 8 (as identified in the
Breaths/min. window) disconnect the fresh gas hose from the
ventilator.

6.15.3 Connect a digital pressure manometer and special Fresh Gas Leak
Test Device to the fresh gas outlet.

6.15.4 Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.

(✔) 6.15.5 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___(<55 cm
H2O)

6.15.6 Remove the manometer and Fresh Gas Leak Test Device.

6.15.7 Reconnect the fresh gas hose to the fresh gas inlet of the Divan.

6.15.8 Press the Manual/Spontaneous button, then press the selection knob
on the ventilator control panel to cancel the self test and set to
Manual/Spontaneous mode. If the Divan displays COMPLETE TEST,
press the ventilator override switch.

6.15.9 Verify that the oxygen flowmeter indicates 150 to 200 mL/min.

6-30 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.16 Divan Maintenance

(✔) 6.16.1 Breasy Inspection

6.16.1.1 Remove the O2 Med sensor from the inspiratory valve dome
and examine the two O-rings.

6.16.1.2 Remove the inspiratory and expiratory valve domes and


discs.

6.16.1.3 Are any pins on the valve assemblies broken or bent?


Inspiratory ___(N) Expiratory ___(N)

6.16.1.4 Are any pins on the valve domes broken?


Inspiratory ___(N) Expiratory ___(N)

6.16.1.5 Are the valve discs in good condition?


Inspiratory ___(Y) Expiratory ___(Y)

6.16.1.6 Are the valve dome washers in good condition? ___(Y)

6.16.1.7 Reinstall the inspiratory and expiratory valve discs and


domes.

6.16.1.8 Check flow sensor connections, O-rings and transducers.

6.16.1.9 Remove the absorbent canister and inspect the following:


absorbent canister, gasket, condition of absorbent.

6.16.1.10 Reinstall the absorbent canister.

6.16.1.11 Examine the two O-rings on the valve dome plug.

6.16.1.12 Check APL valve and seat.

6-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.16.2 Divan Component Checks

6.16.2.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

6.16.2.2 Inspect and verify that the housing, touch keys, rotary
transducer, bumper, and bag mount arm are in good
condition.

6.16.2.3 Disconnect all attached hoses, and remove the compact


breathing system.

6.16.2.4 Remove the piston assembly.

6.16.2.5 Is the piston assembly easy to remove? ___(Y)

6.16.2.6 Inspect and verify that the compact breathing system and
piston assembly are in good condition.

6.16.2.7 Partially press the piston rod release screw, and pull the
piston rod out (see illustration).

6.16.2.8 If the rod shows signs of excessive wear, replace the entire
piston cylinder unit.

6.16.2.9 Wipe off any old lubricant and wear debris.

6.16.2.10 Apply a thin film of Molykote 55 lubricant (P/N 4115127) to


the rod, then return the piston rod to its previous position.

BACK VIEW SIDE VIEW

PISTON ROD
(PULL OUT AND
APPLY
LUBRICATION)

SV00029
PISTON ROD RELEASE SCREW
(PARTIALLY PRESS IN TO
RELEASE PISTON ROD)

6-32 Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.16.2.11 Empty the water trap beneath Lip Seal B1 in the Divan
chassis using a pipet.

CAUTION: Do not seal off lip seal at outlet, as otherwise vacuum could
destroy Pressure Sensor PE2.

MECHANICAL SUPPORT POINTS


SU00204
FOR PISTON CYLINDER UNIT

LIP
SEAL C1
HEATER CONTACT
PLATE (APPROX. 65° C)

MECHANICAL SUPPORT
POINTS FOR COMPACT DRIVE
BREATHING SYSTEM BLOCK

LIP
SEAL B1

TOP VIEW OF DIVAN VENTILATOR CHASSIS


(BREATHING SYSTEM AND PISTON-CYLINDER UNIT REMOVED)

6.16.3 Verify that the locking mechanism operates correctly. Lubricate the
drive block which moves the breathing system to the pneumatic
interface with Molykote 55M.

6.16.4 Are the support points tight? Compact breathing system must be
parallel with pneumatic interface and must be horizontal.

Rev. K 6-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.16.5 Locking plate M29663 or rod locking mechanism must not be bent.

SU00200

LOCKING PLATE
M29663

FRONT VIEW OF PISTON ROD


LOCKING MECHANISM
(PISTON-CYLINDER UNIT REMOVED)

6.16.6 CPU 1 Battery Check:

6.16.6.1 Remove the two screws securing the PCB cover plate Lift out
the plate and board retainer.

6.16.6.2 Remove the CPU 1 board. Locate the lithium battery on the
CPU 1 board. See illustration.

6.16.6.3 If the battery does not have a “Replace By...” label, the
required replacement interval must be established. Refer to
Servce Procedure SP00206, Lithium Battery Replacement.

If the battery has a label and the date printed on the label is
less than three months from the current date, replace the
battery. Refer to Service Procedure SP00206.

6.16.6.4 Reinstall the board retainer and PCB cover plate.

6-34 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

LITHIUM BATTERY

CPU 1 BOARD

Rev. K 6-34A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.16.7 Breathing System Heater Check:

6.16.7.1 Verify (after several minutes) that the heater contact surface
is cool.

WARNING: The temperature of the breathing system heater may be


as high as approximately 65° C.

6.16.7.2 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

6.16.7.3 Press down on the heating contact surface with your hand.

6.16.7.4 Verify that the temperature slowly increases.

6.16.7.5 Remove the pressure from the heating contact surface.

6.16.7.6 Verify that the heater switches off and the surface returns to
its original position.

6.16.7.7 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

6-34B Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.17 Divan Service Mode

(✔) 6.17.1 Pressure Sensor Zero Calibration

NOTE: The compact breathing system and piston cylinder unit must be
removed from the Divan during these tests.

6.17.1.1 Start the Divan in the Service Mode by pressing the left pad
of the STANDBY button and the pad above it, while turning
the System Power switch to ON.

6.17.1.2 Turn the knob to display CONFIG VALVES, and press the
knob.

6.17.1.3 Press the PEEP button on the control panel to vent control
pressure.

6.17.1.4 Press the knob.

6.17.1.5 Turn the knob to display A/D CONVERTER, and press the
knob.

6.17.1.6 Verify that the CHANNEL 0 (PE1) display shows a decimal


value (left side of numeric display) between 506 and 717.

6.17.1.7 Turn the knob to select Channel 1 (PE2).

6.17.1.8 Verify that the CHANNEL 1 display shows a decimal value


(left side of numeric display) between 506 and 717.

6.17.1.9 Press the knob to exit the function.

Rev. K 6-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.17.2 Pressure Sensor Linearity Test

6.17.2.1 Turn the knob to select ‘CALIB SENSORS?’ and press the
knob to perform the calibration. Display should then indicate
SENSOR CALIB! and then return to CALIB SENSORS?.

6.17.2.2 Turn the knob to select CONFIG VALVES and press the
knob. Display should indicate xxx000000.

6.17.2.3 Press the knob to exit the function.

6.17.2.4 Turn the knob to select DISP. PRESS. VAL. and press the
knob. The display shows xxxx yyyy zzzz where:

xxxx indicates PE1 pressure (Airway)

yyyy indicates PE2 pressure (Piston)

zzzz indicates PE3 pressure (Control)

in 1/10 cm H2O.

6.17.2.5 Airway pressure display should indicate 0 ±2 cm H2O.

6.17.2.6 Install the piston and compact breathing system, and restore
the breathing system connections. Set the APL to 30 cm H2O.

6.17.2.7 Remove the bag hose from the telescoping pole and connect it
to the Y-piece.

6.17.2.8 Disconnect the gas sample return line from its port on the
breathing system and connect a test pressure meter to the
port.

6.17.2.9 Open the air or oxygen flow control valve so that the pressure
can build up and APL enters working range.

Readjust APL valve if necessary to maintain 30 cm H2O on


the test pressure meter.

6.17.2.10 Verify that PE1 and PE2 displays do not differ by more than
3 cm H2O.

6.17.2.11 Remove the test equipment

6-36 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.17.3 PE3 Sensor and Control Pressure Check

6.17.3.1 Remove the compact breathing system.

6.17.3.2 Occlude the V2 and V7 ports.

6.17.3.3 Divan display should indicate 870 ±40 for PE3.

LOCKING BAR

SU00203

V7 V1 V6 V3 V2

BREATHING SYSTEM PNEUMATIC INTERFACE


(VIEW FROM LEFT SIDE WITH BREATHING SYSTEM REMOVED)

(✔) 6.17.4 Secondary Control Pressure Test

6.17.4.1 Install the compact breathing system, and restore the


breathing system connections.

6.17.4.2 Press and turn the knob to display CONFIG VALVES. Press
the knob.

6.17.4.3 Press the RATE button.

6.17.4.4 Press the knob to exit the function.

6.17.4.5 Turn the knob to select DISP. PRESS. VAL., and press the
knob.

6.17.4.6 Display should indicate that PE3 = 870 ±100.

6-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.17.5 Operating Hours

(✔) 6.17.5.1 Press and turn the knob to display TOTAL HOURS. Press
the knob and record the hours shown on the 7-segment
display for VT and Rate.

6.17.5.2 Press the knob to exit the function.

(✔) 6.17.5.3 Turn the knob to display OPERATING HOURS. Press the
knob and record the hours shown on the 7-segment display
for VT and Rate.

NOTE: Zeroes are not displayed but must be included in the


calculation.

6.17.5.4 Press the knob to exit the function.

NOTE: The Divan has two elapsed-time meters. “TOTAL HOURS”


summates the operating hours while the machine is on (thus
also the standby times). “OPERATING HOURS” only summates
the operating hours when not in Standby Mode.

Pay attention to significance of digit positions! Zeroes are sometimes


presented as a dark field on Rate display.

10,000s 1,000s 100s 10s 1s UNITS

DIVAN
DISPLAY
PANEL

mL [L] Breaths/min.
SU00201
(VT DISPLAY) (RATE DISPLAY)

(✔) 6.17.6 Error Log

6.17.6.1 Turn the knob to display LOGBOOK and press the knob.

6.17.6.2 Review the last ten logbook entries.

NOTE: Address area of logbook $0000 to $004F most recent error can
be found at address [0000].[0000] xxx yyH (xxx error in decimal
form, yy error in hexadecimal form).

Logbook is deleted at end of PMS. Otherwise, the subsequent tests


would produce several “091 5BH” entries.

6-38 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.17.7 Confirm Mode Verification

6.17.7.1 Turn the knob to display “Confirm mode”.

6.17.7.2 Press the knob and scroll to display


“Confirm R-knob”, then press the knob.

6.17.7.3 Exit the function by turning the knob.

6.17.8 Power Up Default Settings

6.17.8.1 Turn the rotary knob to display “Select Parameter”, then


press the knob to confirm selection. The display will then
indicate Default Settings.

6.17.8.2 Referring to the following chart, touch each key to display the
current default value. If a parameter requires adjustment,
rotate the knob to set the correct value:
Parameter Setting
Pmax 25 @ Software Version 7.13
Pmax 30 @ Software Version 7.40
I:E 1.0 : 2.0

6.17.8.3 Press the rotary knob twice to exit the function.

6.17.8.4 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

Rev. L 6-38A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

This page intentionally left blank

6-38B Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.18 Divan Operating Mode Tests

(✔) 6.18.1 Emergency Cold Start Test

6.18.1.1 Install a patient breathing circuit with a test lung attached to


the Y-piece.

6.18.1.2 Verify that the System Power switch has been at STANDBY
until the Divan display blanks out, then wait 10 seconds.

6.18.1.3 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

6.18.1.4 Press the Volume Mode button, then press the knob to
confirm. When VOLUME MODE is displayed, press the
knob.

6.18.1.5 Verify that the ventilator starts mechanical ventilation


within 30 seconds.

• If COMPLETE TEST is displayed, turn the System Power


switch to STANDBY and wait for 10 seconds.
• Turn the System Power switch to ON and follow operator
prompts on control panel to successfully complete the self
test.
• Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, wait 10
seconds, and then repeat the Emergency Cold Start Test.

(✔) 6.18.2 Ventilator Override Test

6.18.2.1 Lift the guard on the ventilator override switch, press and
hold the button until the LED indicator lights.

6.18.2.2 Verify that manual ventilation can be performed with the


breathing bag.

6.18.2.3 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

6.18.3 Power Up Self Test

6.18.3.1 Turn the System Power switch to ON.

(✔) 6.18.3.2 Follow the operator prompts on the control panel to


successfully complete the Divan self test.

(✔) 6.18.3.3 Verify that the leak rate is £100 mL/min.

Rev. K 6-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.18.4 Leak and Compliance Test

6.18.4.1 Press and hold the TEST button for approximately 3 seconds.

6.18.4.2 Verify that the Divan returns to Standby, indicating that the
test is successfully completed.

(✔) 6.18.5 APL Valve Test

6.18.5.1 Connect a test terminal and pressure gauge to the bag


connector using the PDM adapter.

6.18.5.2 Connect a breathing circuit and occlude the Y-piece.

6.18.5.3 Verify that the APL toggle switch is set to MAN.

6.18.5.4 Set the APL control to 70 cm H2O.

6.18.5.5 Verify that the System Power switch is ON.

6.18.5.6 Set the Divan to Manual/Spontaneous mode, and press the


knob.

6.18.5.7 Set the fresh gas flow to 10 L/min. of O2.

6.18.5.8 Is the pressure between 56 and 88 cm H2O? ___(Y)

6.18.5.9 Set the APL control to 10 cm H2O.

6.18.5.10 Is the pressure between 5 and 15 cm H2O? ___(Y)

6.18.5.11 Set the APL control to 30 cm H2O.

6.18.5.12 Is the pressure between 24 and 36 cm H2O? ___(Y)

6.18.5.13 Close the O2 flow control valve.

6.18.5.14 Remove the test gauge.

6-40
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.18.6 Expiration Valve Leak Test

6.18.6.1 Verify that the APL valve is set to Manual mode and adjusted
to 30 cm H2O.

6.18.6.2 Interconnect a hose between the Divan bag port and the
inspiratory valve.

6.18.6.3 Disconnect the gas pod return line from its port on the
breathing system if applicable. Connect a test pressure meter
to the port using the GAP return adapter.

6.18.6.4 Connect a test terminal to the expiratory valve port on the


flow sensor.

6.18.6.5 Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the test terminal.

6.18.6.6 Verify that the System Power switch is ON and the ventilator
is in Manual/Spont mode. Turn up the oxygen flow until the
system pressurizes to 30 cm H2O.

(✔) 6.18.6.7 Verify that the value indicated on the test flowmeter is £60
mL/min.

6.18.6.8 Remove all test equipment.

6.18.7 Inspiratory Valve Leak Test

6.18.7.1 Interconnect a hose between the Divan bag port and the
expiratory port on the flow sensor.

6.18.7.2 Connect a fresh gas leak test adapter and calibrated pressure
meter to the test terminal. Connect the test terminal to the
inspiratory valve.

6.18.7.3 Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the Qdisc male fresh gas


test connector (ref. Page 6-2E), and attach a fresh gas male
test connector to the fresh gas port of the breasy.

6.18.7.4 Verify the Divan is in Manual/Spont. mode.

6.18.7.5 Pressurize the inspiratory limb to 30 cm H2O.

(✔) 6.18.7.6 Verify that the value indicated on the test flowmeter is £60
mL/min.

6.18.7.7 Remove all test equipment, reconnect the fresh gas hose and
flow sensor

Rev. K 6-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.18.8 Flow Direction Test

6.18.8.1 Connect a breathing circuit with a Siemens test lung at the Y-


piece.

6.18.8.2 Attach a bag to the bag hose.

6.18.8.3 Set the oxygen flow to 3 L/min.

6.18.8.4 Inflate the simulated lung by briefly using the O2 Flush.

6.18.8.5 Squeeze the breathing bag attached to the bag hose at a rate
of approximately 10 BPM. Readjust the APL valve if required
to properly ventilate the simulated lung.

6.18.8.6 Observe the operation of each unidirectional valve disc at eye


level and make sure that the inspiratory valve disc raises
only during the inspiration phase, and the expiratory valve
raises only during the exhalation phase. Watch the valves
until satisfied that both valves operate correctly, and move
freely without sticking.

WARNING: To ensure proper direction of gas flow during inspiratory


and expiratory phases, the disks in the inspiratory and
expiratory valves must move freely, without sticking.

(✔) 6.18.9 Volume Ventilation Test

6.18.9.1 Set the fresh gas flow to 3 L/min.

6.18.9.2 Set Pmax to 40 cm H2O.

6.18.9.3 Set the Tidal Volume to 400 mL.

6.18.9.4 Set the Rate to 12/min.

6.18.9.5 Set the %IP to 0.

6.18.9.6 Press the VOLUME button, and verify “Volume Mode?” text
message is displayed.

6.18.9.7 Press the knob to confirm.

6.18.9.8 Verify that the ventilator performs mechanical ventilation.

6.18.9.9 Verify that the ventilator does not make any scraping noises.

6-42 Rev. B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.18.10 PEEP Test

6.18.10.1 Continue volume ventilation with conditions from the


previous test.

6.18.10.2 Verify that PEEP = 0 +2 on workstation monitor. Press the


knob.

6.18.10.3 Increase PEEP to 10 cm H2O.

6.18.10.4 Verify that PEEP = 10 ±2 cm H2O on workstation monitor.

6.18.10.5 Increase PEEP to 20 cm H2O. Press the knob.

6.18.10.6 Verify that PEEP = 20 ±3 cm H2O on workstation monitor.

6.18.10.7 Set PEEP to 0 cm H2O. Press the knob.

(✔) 6.18.11 Pressure Ventilation Test

6.18.11.1 Continue ventilation with conditions from previous test.

6.18.11.2 Press the Pres Mode button, and verify “Pressure Mode?” text
message is displayed.

6.18.11.3 Press knob to confirm.

6.18.11.4 Verify that ventilator continues to perform mechanical


ventilation.

6.18.11.5 Verify that the indicator in the upper left corner of the Press
Mode button is now illuminated.

(✔) 6.18.12 SIMV Ventilation Test

6.18.12.1 Continue ventilation with conditions from previous test.

6.18.12.2 Press the SIMV button, and verify “SIMV Mode?” text
message is displayed.

6.18.12.3 Press knob to confirm.

6.18.12.4 Press the SIMV Rate button and set SIMV Rate to 6/min.
Press the knob to confirm.

6.18.12.5 Start a stopwatch on commencement of inspiration.

Rev. E 6-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.18.12.6 Generate a shallow negative trigger pulse with test lung after
8 seconds. (Apply four 1x4 in. strips of doublesided tape
between the test lung case and the bag.)

6.18.12.7 Verify that a synchronized inspiration stroke is triggered.

(✔) 6.18.13 Manual Ventilator Test

6.18.13.1 Press the Manual/Spontaneous button, and verify “Manual/


Spont.?” text message is displayed.

6.18.13.2 Press the knob to confirm.

6.18.13.3 Connect a Siemens test lung.

6.18.13.4 Set the fresh gas flow to 3 L/min.

6.18.13.5 Set the APL valve to MAN.

6.18.13.6 Verify that manual ventilation can be implemented with the


breathing bag.

(✔) 6.18.14 Spontaneous Breathing Test

6.18.14.1 Set the APL valve to SPONT.

6.18.14.2 Verify that spontaneous breathing can be implemented with


the test lung.

6-44 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.19 Respiratory Volume

6.19.1 Touch the VOLUME numbox. Is the box highlighted? ___(Y)

6.19.2 What is the LO MIN VOL alarm default? ___(1.0)

6.19.3 Verify that the MIN VOL has a LO alarm limit range from 0.2 to 10.0
by increments of 0.1.

6.19.4 Remove the flow sensor from the breathing circuit, and set the Divan
to Volume Mode.

6.19.5 Adjust the LO MIN VOL alarm to 2.0 liters.

6.19.6 Set the volume alarm to OFF.

6.19.7 Touch the volume ALARMS ON to enable the volume alarms and start
a stopwatch.

(✔) 6.19.8 What is the time when the APNEA-VOL is activated on the central
alarm display? ___sec (13-17)

6.19.9 Verify that the MIN VOL LOW message appears as a CAUTION.

(✔) 6.19.10 What is the time when the APNEA-VOL is activated on the central
alarm display? ___sec (26-34)

6.19.11 Set the ventilator to Volume Mode.

6.19.12 Set the frequency to 6.

6.19.13 Set the I:E Ratio to 1:2.

6.19.14 Set the oxygen flow to 2 L/min.

6.19.15 Set the Tidal Volume to 200 mL.

6.19.16 Reattach the flow sensor, and attach a patient circuit to the absorber
system.

6.19.17 After the first breath is detected, does the APNEA-VOL WARNING
deactivate? ___(Y)

(✔) 6.19.18 Within one (1) minute, does the MIN VOL LOW message appear as a
CAUTION? ___(Y)

Rev. K 6-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.19.19 Adjust the LO alarm limit 0.1 liter below the indicated minute
volume.

6.19.20 Does the MIN VOL LOW CAUTION deactivate? ___(Y)

6.19.21 Increase the tidal volume to 1000 mL and Pmax to 80 cm H2O.

6.19.22 Install a 33mm x 22mm adapter onto each test volumeter port.

6.19.23 Disconnect the 22mm hose at the flow sensor, and attach it to the
adapter at the top of the volumeter.

6.19.24 Connect a 22mm x 12 inch hose between the flow sensor and the
connection at the bottom of the test volumeter.

6.19.25 Press the Standby key. Press the knob to confirm. Disconnect the test
lung and occlude the Y-piece.

6.19.26 Press the TEST key on the Divan to calculate the additional hose
compliance. Reattach test lung to the patient circuit and return the
Divan to Volume Mode operation.

(✔) 6.19.27 Is the TID VOL on the test volumeter within 15% of the Divan Vt
setting? ___(Y)

6.19.28 Create a reverse flow by removing the flow sensor and lightly blowing
through it in the reverse direction.

(✔) 6.19.29 Each time a reverse flow of greater than 20 mL is detected, does the
REVERSE FLOW message appear as an ADVISORY? ___(Y)

6.19.30 Reinstall the flow sensor.

6.19.31 Disconnect the respiratory volume sensor from the VOLUME


SENSOR interface.

6.19.32 Does the VOL SEN DISC message appear in the ADVISORY column?
___(Y)

6.19.33 Reconnect the volume sensor to the VOLUME SENSOR interface.

6.19.34 Put the Divan ventilator in standby mode.

6.19.35 Remove the test equipment.

6-46 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.20 Pressure Monitor

6.20.1 Apnea Pressure Test

6.20.1.1 Disconnect the breathing pressure pilot line from the


NM6000 monitor interface.

6.20.1.2 Zero a calibrated pressure meter to ambient air pressure.

6.20.1.3 Connect the pressure monitor adapter to a calibrated


pressure meter and attach to NM6000 monitor interface.

6.20.1.4 Bring up the Pressure notebook on the screen; press the


setup tab and set the Apnea threshold to 8 cm.

6.20.1.5 Simultaneously set the ventilator Volume Mode and start a


stopwatch.

(✔) 6.20.1.6 What is the time when APNEA PRESSURE appears on the
alarm display as a CAUTION? ___sec. (13-17)

(✔) 6.20.1.7 What is the time when APNEA PRESSURE appears on the
alarm display as a WARNING? ___sec. (26-34)

(✔) 6.20.1.8 Slowly increase the test pressure. At what pressure does the
APNEA PRRESSURE alarm deactivate? ___cmH2O (7-9)

6.20.1.9 Press the ventilator Standby button, and verify “Standby?”


text message is displayed.

6.20.1.10 Press knob to confirm.

6.20.2 Continuing Pressure Alarm Test

6.20.2.1 Increase the test pressure above the threshold line shown on
the display, and begin timing with a stopwatch.

(✔) 6.20.2.2 What is the time when CONTINUOUS PRES appears as a


warning? ___sec (13-17)

(✔) 6.20.2.3 Decrease the pressure slowly. What is the pressure at which
the CONTINUOUS PRES alarm deactivates? ___cmH2O (7-
9)

Rev. D 6-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.20.3 High Pressure Alarm Test

6.20.3.1 Verify that the HIGH PRESSURE alarm is set at 50 cm H2O.

(✔) 6.20.3.2 Slowly increase the test pressure. At what pressure does a
VENT PRESS HI alarm activate as a warning? ___cmH2O
(47-53)

6.20.4 Sub-Atmospheric Pressure Alarm Test

6.20.4.1 Slowly create a sub-atmospheric test pressure.

(✔) 6.20.4.2 At what pressure does the SUB ATM PRES warning alarm
activate? ___cmH2O (-7 to -13)

(✔) 6.20.5 Alarm Circuit Delay Test

6.20.5.1 Create any “Warning Alarm” condition.

6.20.5.2 Press the ALARM SILENCE button located in the alarm box.

6.20.5.3 Verify that the audio portion of the alarm is silenced.

6.20.5.4 Verify that a 60 appears at the bottom of the alarm box.

6.20.5.5 Press the ALARM SILENCE twice.

6.20.5.6 Verify that a 120 appears at the bottom of the alarm box.

6.20.5.7 Press the Setup softkey and select the Setup tab.

6.20.5.8 Press the Test Primary Speakers key to access the System
Setup Notebook and verify that the primary speaker tests
passed.

6.20.5.9 Press the Test Backup Speaker key and verify that the
backup speaker test passed.

6.20.5.10 Press the Setup softkey to close the System Setup Notebook.

6.20.5.11 Remove test equipment and reconnect the breathing pressure


pilot line to the NM6000 monitor interface.

6-48 Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.21 Agent Analyzer Accuracy Test

NOTE: Before performing the accuracy test, the GA-ID pod must be in the full
accuracy mode. The CO2 and Agent warm-up messages shall not appear on
the advisory display.

NOTE: Before performing the accuracy test, the oxygen analyzer must display
21% FIO2. The oxygen sensor must be exposed to ambient air during the
entire GA-ID pod accuracy testing.

6.21.1 Sample Flow Test

6.21.1.1 Verify that an oxygen supply is connected to the machine.

6.21.1.2 Examine the sample circuit consisting of the airway adapter/


filter, sample line, semi-permeable tube, and water trap
container. Replace any components as needed.

6.21.1.3 Connect a capnomed flowmeter test stand to a gas sample


line, using a Luer lock fitting and thread sealant in the port
at the top of the capnomed flowmeter.

6.21.1.3A Touch the CO2 numbox and adjust the slider bar to max flow.

(✔) 6.21.1.4 What is the sample flow rate? ___mL/min. (175 to 225)

6.21.2 Line Block Test

6.21.2.1 Continue using the configuration from the previous test.

6.21.2.2 Attach the hose at the lower port of the capnomed flowmeter
test stand to the hose barb on the auxiliary O2 flowmeter.

6.21.2.3 Turn the auxiliary O2 flowmeter flow control valve clockwise


until the capnomed flowmeter indicates 75 mL/min.

(✔) 6.21.2.4 Verify that a CO2 LINE BLOCK message appears on the
monitor in approximately 15 seconds.

6.21.2.5 Remove the test equipment, and close the auxiliary O2 flow
control valve.

6.21.2.6 Verify that the LINE BLOCK message has cleared.

Rev. E 6-49
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.21.3 Accuracy Test

NOTE: Before performing the accuracy test, the vaporizers must be


exposed to a constant temperature (preferably 22° C) for at least one
hour.

6.21.3.1 Attach the CO2 calibration adapter assembly (P/N 4110216)


to the CO2 calibration cylinder (P/N 4107979). Attach the
sample line to the Luer connector on the cal adapter.

6.21.3.2 Turn the flow control valve on the calibration adapter slightly
counter-clockwise.

(✔) 6.21.3.3 After one minute, verify that the MEAN CO2 display
indicates within 4.8% to 5.2% or 36.0 to 40.0 mmHg.

6.21.3.4 Verify that the MEAN AGENT on the agent display indicates
within 0 to 0.4% or blank to indicate no valid agent reading.

(✔) 6.21.3.5 Verify that the MEAN N2O indicates within 32.0 to 38.0%

6.21.3.6 Turn off the flow and remove the sample line from the
calibration adapter.

6.21.3.7 Ensure that all vaporizer handwheels are set to their zero, or
OFF position.

6.21.3.8 Fill each vaporizer to be tested with the correct anesthetic


agent until the liquid level is within the correct range as
indicated on the sight glass. DO NOT OVER FILL.

6.21.3.9 Calibrate a Riken gas analyzer as per manufacturer’s


instructions.

6.21.3.10 Connect a Riken test adapter to the inspiratory port of the


breathing system. Connect an airway adapter with a Luer
fitting to the Riken test adapter.

6.21.3.11 Connect the scavenger hose to the airway adapter, and


connect the Riken gas analyzer and GA-ID pod sample line to
the test adapter.

6.21.3.12 Remove the 22 mm hose and occlude the Divan bag port with
a test terminal and squeeze bulb.

6.21.3.13 Set the Divan to Manual/Spont. mode and press the knob.
Verify that the APL toggle is set to Man, and adjust for 30 cm
H2O.

6-50 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.21.3.14 Set the oxygen flow to 10 L/min. to flush the system of


residual gases.

6.21.3.15 Reduce the oxygen flow to 4.0 L/min.

6.21.3.16 Slowly adjust a vaporizer to the 1.0% volume concentration,


and wait five minutes for the vaporizer to stabilize.

(✔) 6.21.3.17 Multiply the current reading on the Riken gas analyzer by
the appropriate conversion factor from the table at the end of
this procedure, and record the result.

6.21.3.18 Verify that the MEAN AGENT value is within the sum of
tolerances of the vaporizer and the Riken gas analyzer.

6.21.3.19 Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 2.5% volume concentration,


and wait for the vaporizer to stabilize.

6.21.3.20 Repeat Steps 6.21.3.17 and 6.21.3.18.

6.21.3.21 Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 4.0% volume concentration,


and wait for the vaporizer to stabilize.

6.21.3.22 Repeat Steps 6.21.3.17 and 6.21.3.18.

6.21.3.23 Turn the vaporizer OFF.

(✔) 6.21.3.24 Repeat Steps 6.21.3.14 thru 6.21.3.23 for the other vaporizers
(including the one mounted in the rear storage position, if
applicable).

NOTE: If any reading is outside of the GA-ID pod tolerance limits,


the GA-ID pod must be replaced, and then this test procedure must
be repeated.

6.21.3.25 Remove the test equipment and reconnect the scavenger hose
and patient circuit to the Divan.

VAPORIZER SETTINGS AND CONVERSION


ALLOWABLE RANGES FACTORS
ANESTHETIC
AGENT
Riken Riken
1% 2.5% 4%
Model 18H Model 1802D

Halothane 0.92 to 1.28 2.30 to 3.20 3.58 to 5.02 x 1.0 x 0.74

Enflurane 0.87 to 1.33 2.175 to 3.325 3.38 to 5.22 x 1.08 x 0.80

Isoflurane 0.92 to 1.28 2.30 to 3.20 3.58 to 5.02 x 1.05 x 0.78

Sevoflurane 0.87 to 1.33 2.175 to 3.325 3.38 to 5.22 x 1.09 x 0.81

Rev. C 6-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.22 O2 Flush Valve

6.22.1 Disconnect the nitrous oxide pipeline hose and close the cylinder valve
(if applicable).

6.22.2 Set the oxygen flow rate to 5 L/min.

6.22.3 Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to its counter-clockwise stop.

6.22.4 After the nitrous oxide flow stops, close the nitrous oxide flow control
valve.

6.22.5 Close the oxygen flow control valve.

6.22.6 Disconnect any additional pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves
except oxygen (if applicable).

6.22.7 Bleed the pressure from the Air gas circuit.

6.22.8 Press and release the O2 Flush button.

6.22.9 Does the flow of oxygen stop immediately? ___(Y)

6.22.10 Using a volumeter adapter, connect a test minute volumeter to the


fresh gas hose.

6.22.11 Press the O2 Flush button.

(✔) 6.22.12 What is the oxygen flush flow rate? ___ L/min.(45-65)

6.22.13 Remove the test volumeter and adapter. Reconnect the fresh gas hose.

6.22.14 Insert a calibrated O2 sensor into the inspiratory valve dome.

6.22.15 Press the O2 Flush button.

(✔) 6.22.16 What is the O2 concentration? ___ %O2 (97-100)

6.22.17 Remove the O2 sensor from the valve dome.

6.22.18 Close the oxygen cylinder valve.

6.22.19 Bleed pressure from the O2 circuit by pressing the O2 Flush button.

6-52
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6.23 Reset Logbook

6.23.1 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions when handling the PCB assemblies. Static
discharge can damage components on these assemblies.

6.23.2 Set the 3rd DIP switch on the ADDA PCB to the down position.

6.23.3 Start the Divan in the Service Mode by pressing and holding the left
pad of the Standby button and the pad above it while turning the
System Power switch to ON.

6.23.4 Press the knob.

6.23.5 Turn the knob to display LOGBOOK, and press the knob.

6.23.6 Press the Pmax key to reset the display to [0000] 000 00 H.

6.23.7 Return the 3rd DIP switch to its original (up) position.

6.23.8 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.

6.23.9 Replace the PCB cover plate and secure it with the screws that were
previously removed.

SU00202

TOP VIEW OF DIVAN


PCB COMPARTMENT WITH
COVER PLATE REMOVED

CPU2 ADDA CPU1

DIP SWITCHES

Rev. K 6-53
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6.24 Electrical Safety

(✔) 6.24.1 Protective Ground Continuity

NOTE: Do not plug the safety analyzer power cord into a line isolation
monitor, as inaccurate readings may occur.

6.24.1.1 Plug the unit into the safety analyzer, and plug the power
cord of the safety analyzer into a 120 V receptacle.

6.24.1.2 Turn on the safety analyzer and set the function switch to the
GROUND WIRE RESISTANCE position. Attach the test lead
to the SINGLE LEAD connector.

6.24.1.3 Set the safety analyzer GROUND switch to the NORMAL


position. Set the POLARITY switch to the OFF position.

6.24.1.4 The safety analyzer shall indicate 0.1 ohms or less with its
test lead applied to the following points:

--Cylinder yoke
--Side rail handle
--Convenience outlet ground socket

(✔) 6.24.2 Convenience Outlet and Auxiliary Outlet Strip

NOTE: This test will check the convenience outlets and auxiliary strip outlets
for fault conditions such as open ground (>31W), reverse polarity,
open line and open neutral. This is done each time the BIOTECH 501
PRO is powered up and allowed to cycle through its self test.

6.24.2.1 Shut off and unplug the safety analyzer. Remove the
anesthesia machine plug from the analyzer, and plug it into
the same outlet that was being used by the analyzer.

6.24.2.2 Plug the safety analyzer into the first convenience outlet to
be tested, and turn the analyzer power switch ON. Allow the
analyzer to cycle through its Auto Test sequence. If no fault is
indicated, shut off the analyzer.

6.24.2.3 Shut off and unplug the safety analyzer.

6.24.3 Chassis Leakage Current Test

NOTE: Do not plug the safety analyzer power cord into a line isolation
monitor, as inaccurate readings may occur.

6-54 Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6.24.3.1 Unplug the NM6000 and plug it into the safety analyzer.
Plug the power cord of the safety analyzer into a 120 V
receptacle and turn it on.

6.24.3.2 Set the safety analyzer to the CHASSIS LEAKAGE


CURRENT position.

6.24.3.3 Attach the safety analyzer test lead to a cylinder yoke.

(✔) 6.24.3.4 Record the total leakage current with the polarity and ground
switches set to the following positions:

Ground Polarity
Open Normal
Normal Normal
Open Reversed
Normal Reversed
Verify that the leakage current is 250 microamps or less in
each of the switch positions.

6.24.3.5 Turn off and disconnect the safety analyzer.

(✔) 6.25 Vapor Exclusion System

6.25.1 Set both vapors to zero. Move exclusion lever to the far right. *Does
the lever properly engage without binding? ___(Y)

6.25.2 Is it possible to turn on the right position vapor? ___(N)

6.25.3 Move exclusion lever to the far left. *Does the lever properly engage
without binding? ___(Y)

6.25.4 Is it possible to turn on the left position vapor? ___(N)

* Refer to Section 3.3, Troubleshooting Guide 12.

(✔) 6.26 Table Top Lamp

Verify that both table top lamps are functional.

(✔) 6.27 Flowmeter Lights


Verify that the flowmeter lights are illuminated.

(✔) 6.28 CRT Fan


Verify that air is flowing from the vent slots on the rear panel behind the CRT.
NOTE: There is no fan on machines with a flat panel display.

Rev. L 6-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6.29 Operator’s Instruction Manual

Verify that the availability/location of the machine’s Operator’s Instruction


Manual (including Divan) is in close proximity of the machine.

(✔) 6.30 Final Check

6.30.1 Restore all connections to the patient interface panel.

6.30.2 Verify that the pipeline hoses are connected to the hospital pipeline
outlets.

6.30.3 Verify that the O2 sensor is removed from the inspiratory valve dome.

6.30.4 Verify that the inspiratory valve dome is plugged.

6.30.5 Verify that the machine is plugged into a live outlet.

6.30.6 Press and hold the Divan TEST button for 3 seconds. Verify that the
Divan completes a leak and compliance test and returns to Standby,
indicating that the test is successfully completed.

6.30.7 Verify the correct date and time on the Narkomed 6000 main display
screen.

6.30.8 Return all machine controls and settings to their original state.

6-56 Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE

6A.0 Test Procedure for the Integrated Patient Monitor

The following pages contain the PMC procedures for the Integrated Patient
Monitoring Module. The purpose of the PMC procedure is to provide service
personnel with a method that can be used to verify operational and functional
performance of the monitor. Failure to attain any of the listed results indicates a
potential malfunction of the monitor.

The procedures in this section shall be performed in their entirety at initial


installation, during all scheduled periodic maintenance certification (PMC) visits,
and each time a Integrated Patient Monitoring Module is removed, replaced,
calibrated or adjusted. A PMC Checklist form, P/N 4116820, available from the
Draeger Medical, Inc. Technical Service Department, shall be completed by the
Technical Service Representative each time a PMC is performed.The section
numbers on the checklist form are keyed to paragraph numbers in this manual.
Steps in the procedure marked with (✔) require a response at the corresponding
line on the checklist form.

The PMC procedure is based on the assumption that the Integrated Patient
Monitoring Module being tested is used with known good cables and test
equipment. It also requires that the user be somewhat familiar with the operation
of all test equipment required for the PMC procedure. For more information
concerning operation of these components, refer to the respective operator manual.

Test Equipment Required:

Test equipment listed with an asterisk (*) requires calibration at a maximum


interval of one year. Verify the dates on test equipment calibration labels. DO NOT
USE any test equipment having an expired calibration date. Notify your
supervisor immediately if any equipment is found to be out of calibration.

In the space provided at the bottom of the checklist form, record the Model and ID
number of all calibrated test equipment used.

The following table lists the test equipment, adapters, and cables necessary to
successfully complete the PMC procedure. The PMC procedure was written for the
test equipment in the following table. If test equipment other than the
manufacturer’s recommendation is used, it may be necessary to slightly modify
some test steps.

Rev. L 6A-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

MARQUETTE TEST EQUIPMENT for INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE

Description Part # Qty Vendor Notes


* Electrical Safety Analyzer, Biotek 501 Pro or equiv. 1 Biotek Can also be obtained locally
* Multifunction Patient Simulator Kit 4117115 1 DMI Marquette #MARQ II Kit
* SPO2 Simulator 4117116 1 DMI Marquette #408610-001

MARQUETTE MATERIALS for INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE

Description Part # Qty Vendor Notes


ECG 5-Leadwire Set 4113274 1 DMI
ECG Cable, 5-leadwire, AHA 4113273 1 DMI
NIBP Adult Cuff 4113395-004 1 DMI
NIBP Interface Cable 4113454 1 DMI
NIBP Test Adapter 4116111 1 DMI
SPO2 Finger Probe 4113823 1 DMI
SPO2 Interface Cable 4113453 1 DMI
Blood Pressure Cable Adapter (Amp to Nicolay) Pigtail 4117117 3 DMI Marquette #700095-001
Cardiac Output Cable Adapter (Amp to Nicolay) Pigtail 4117118 1 DMI Marquette #700092-001
Marq-II Blood Pressure Cable 4117119 3 DMI Marquette #5183072
Marq-II Carrying Case 4117120 1 DMI Marquette #6770042
Marq-II Temperature Cable Y.S.I. 400 4117121 1 DMI Marquette #5183001
Marq-II Temperature Cable Y.S.I. 700 4117122 1 DMI Marquette #5183002
SPO2 Adapter Cable 4117123 1 DMI Marquette #700232
Defib Sync Connector 4117114 1 DMI

MARQUETTE TEST MATERIALS for STRIP CHART RECORDER


Description Part # Qty Vendor Notes
Chart Paper 4110335 1 DMI

* Requires calibration at a maximum interval of one year.

6A-2 Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

6A.1 Electrical Safety Analysis

NOTE: Do not plug the safety analyzer power cord into a line isolation
monitor, as inaccurate readings may occur.

6A.1.1 Lead Isolation Factor:

6A.1.1.1 Disconnect the ECG cable from the Integrated Patient


Monitoring Module interface.

NOTE: Reference your Safety Analyzer operator manual for specific


operations to perform these tests.

6A.1.1.2 Connect the power cord of the safety analyzer to an AC


receptacle.

6A.1.1.3 Connect the power cord of the unit under test to the safety
analyzer.

6A.1.1.4 Connect the ECG cable leads to the safety analyzer, but do not
connect the cable to the Integrated Patient Monitoring Module.

6A.1.1.5 Set the safety analyzer Power Switch to ON. Turn the System
Power switch to ON.

6A.1.1.6 Set the safety analyzer to measure ECG leakage current.

6A.1.1.7 Select for all leads to be tested (ALL - GND).

CAUTION: During this testing, DO NOT touch the ECG posts.

6A.1.1.8 Press and hold the ISOLATION key.

(✔) 6A.1.1.9 Record the reading from the display (referred to as the Lead
Isolation Factor) on the test report.

6A.1.1.10 Release the ISOLATION key.

6A.1.2 Patient source leakage:

This test checks leakage current from the ECG connector of the monitor
relative to ground.

6A.1.2.1 Connect the ECG cable to the ECG connector of the monitor.

Rev. K 6A-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

(✔) 6A.1.2.2 Record the total leakage current with the Polarity and Ground
switches set to the following positions:

Ground Polarity
Open Normal
Normal Normal
Open Reversed
Normal Reversed
Verify that the leakage current is 10 microamps or less in each of the
switch positions.

6A.1.3 Patient sink leakage:

This tests patient cable leakage current from a 115 VAC source into the ECG
connector of the monitor.

6A.1.3.1 Set power switch on the safety analyzer to ON.

6A.1.3.2 Set the safety analyzer switches as follows:

• Ground switch - NORM,


• Polarity switch - NORM,
• Select ECG leakage (ALL - GND).

WARNING: The following step will cause high voltage (115 VAC) to appear
at the ECG JACK on the safety analyzer. Do not touch the
ECG Jack posts or ECG lead clips during this test as an
electrical shock will occur.

(✔) 6A.1.3.3 Press and hold the ISOLATION key. Read leakage current
indicated on safety analyzer. Release the ISOLATION key.
Subtract the lead isolation factor recorded earlier from this
value.

If the sum of the readings is greater than 10 µA and the monitor


is operating at 115 V/60 Hz, the unit under test fails this test and
should be repaired and tested again.

6A.1.3.4 Change the safety analyzer polarity switch to the REV POL
position.

6A-4 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

(✔) 6A.1.3.5 Press and hold the ISOLATION key. Read leakage current
indicated on safety analyzer. Release the ISOLATION key.
Subtract the lead isolation factor recorded earlier from this
value.

If the sum of the readings is greater than 10 µA and the monitor


is operating at 115 V/60 Hz, the unit under test fails this test and
should be repaired and tested again.

6A.1.3.6 Set the power switch on the safety analyzer to OFF.

6A.1.3.7 Disconnect all test equipment from the Integrated Patient


Monitoring Module. Disconnect the machine power cord plug
from the safety analyzer power receptacle. Disconnect the
safety analyzer from the wall receptacle. Plug the machine's
power cord back into the machine.

6A.2 ECG tests

Touch the Set Up key, select the Traces tab. Note the current selection for
future reference. Select 8 WFs; 3 IBP channels; 5 Lead ECG.

NOTE: Cycle patient multi-parameter simulator to restore unit to power up


default values.

6A.2.1 Turn on the patient multi parameter simulator and enter Code “1” to
select a normal sinus rhythm. Verify the simulator displays:
• Heart rate - 80 bpm,
• Heart rate amplitude - 1.0 mV,

6A.2.2 Connect the 5 ECG leads to the outside row of color coded terminals
at the top of the simulator as follows: RA = wht, RL = grn, V1 = brn
LA = blk, LL = red

6A.2.3 Connect the ECG cable to the Integrated Patient Monitoring Module
interface.

Touch the SpO2 window to open the SpO2 notebook. Toggle the SpO2
tone to Off, then close the SpO2 notebook.

6A.2.4 Touch the HR window to open the HR notebook. Select the Volume
tab and adjust the arrow Up and Down keys on the Integrated
Patient Monitoring Module interface to verify that the audio tone is
adjustable. Move the slider and verify that the audio tone is
adjustable. Return the slider tab to its midpoint.

Rev. L 6A-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued) NM6000

6A.2.5 Select the Site Scale tab. Touch the ECG Channel #1 key. Select Lead
II. Touch the Scale key and select 1.0x.

(✔) 6A.2.6 Verify the following:

• ECG lead II is displayed and is noise-free,


• Heart rate of 80 ± 5 bpm is displayed,
• An audible tone sounds with each R-wave (QRS complex).

(✔) 6A.2.7 Verify Channel 1 I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF; Channel 2 I, II, III, V, aVR
ECG leads are available for viewing and are noise-free. Return lead
selection to Lead II.

6A.2.8 Touch the Scale key and toggle through all 5 scales. Verify they are
available and increase or decrease the size of the waveform. Return
the scale to 1.0x

6A.2.9 Touch the HR Alarms tab and note all HR alarm parameters.

6A.2.10 Toggle the Alarm control to ON.

(✔) 6A.2.11 Raise the Heart Rate Limit Set Lo alarm above the actual value.
Verify HRT RATE LOW appears as a Warning. Readjust the alarm to
below the actual value. The alarm shall cease. Return the alarm to
its original position.

(✔) 6A.2.12 Lower the Heart Rate Set Hi below the actual value. Verify HRT
RATE HI appears as a Caution. Readjust the alarm to above the
actual value. The alarm shall cease. Return the alarm to its original
position.

(✔) 6A.2.13 Enter Code “3” and use the simulator’s increment key to adjust the
simulator heart rate amplitude to 2.0 mV. Enter Code “110” to set the
simulator’s Pace to Asynchronous Pacemaker rate.

NOTE: Touch the Relearn key if ‘astol’ is displayed.

Touch the ECG setup tab and toggle the Pace Pulse to Normal.

Observe the following while viewing ECG leads II, III, aVR, aVF, and
V:
• a P appears above to the right of the heart icon indicating
pacemaker pulse detection is enabled, and
• the heart rate still reads 75 ± 5 bpm.

6A.2.14 Disable the monitor’s pacemaker pulse detection and return the
simulator to these conditions by entering Code “1” for NSR and Code
“3” decrement to 1.0 mV. Verify the simulator displays:

6A-6 Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM6000 INTEGRATED PATIENT MONITORING MODULE PMC PROCEDURE (continued)

• Heart rate - 80 bpm,


• Heart rate amplitude - 1.0 mV,

6A.2.15 Select ECG lead II for viewing in the top trace position on the
monitor display.

6A.2.16 Disconnect the RA leadwire from the patient simulator.

(✔) 6A.2.17 Observe following:


• a ECG RA DISC messa